Alcatel - Umts Radio Network Planning Guidelines

Site LUDWIGSBURG Originator(s) O. Aydin, U. Birkel, A. Gaertner, RM. Goerner, M. Hahn, L.
Sanchez-Perez Domain Product Division Rubric Type Distribution Codes : : : : : MOBILE COMMUNICATION DIVISION
UMTS RADIO NETWORK PLANNING GUIDELINE
NETWORK PLANNING UMTS/GSM GENERAL METHODS GENERAL GUIDELINE Internal : IDDL External : EDDL
PREDISTRIBUTION (for document reading cycle) PCS PCS PCS MND PCS ABSTRACT This guideline is giving an introduction into RNP relevant aspects of UMTS. It is shown how to dimension, how to plan and how to perform measurements in an UMTS network based on Wide Band CDMA. KEYWORDS UMTS, RNP, Guideline, Planning, Dimensioning, Traffic K. Heinlein J. Kozlik HJ. Machjer K. Daniel E. Nguyen PCS PCS PCS MND E. Salomon T. Lebugle C. Moignard Y. Dupuch
Approvals (get approvals from document manager)

Name App. Name App. ? Appraisal Authority: C. Brechtmann U. Birkel K. Heinlein
ED MCD
02
RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc
CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA
5-Apr-2001 1/2
REVIEW Edition Date Review Report Identification
HISTORY Edition 01 01 01 02 Date 19.01.2001 23.01.2001 07.02.2001 05.04.2001 Reason of change Creation of document Draft 01 Proposal 01 Excluding confidential information from chapters 4 and 5
Short description of significant changes to previous edition:

Edition Changes
INTERNAL REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Not applicable FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Not applicable IDDL - ALCATEL-INTERNAL DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION LIST PCS ISC Manager BR Operation Manager
Documentation Management Systems : DIAMS EDDL - ALCATEL-EXTERNAL DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION LIST
END OF ALCATEL INTERNAL PART OF THE DOCUMENT
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 2/2
CONFIDENTIAL Guideline TABLE OF CONTENTS REFERENCED DOCUMENTS..................................................................................................................... 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................. 6 PREFACE ........................................................................................................................................................ 6 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................................................. 6 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 6 1 RNP PROCESS DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................ 8 2 WCDMA FUNDAMENTALS AND UMTS AIR INTERFACE ........................................................................... 9 2.1 UMTS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE ............................................................................................................... 9 2.1.1 UE ( User Equipment) .............................................................................................................................. 9 2.1.2 UTRAN (UMTS Radio Access Network) .............................................................................................. 10 2.1.3 CN (Core network) ................................................................................................................................. 10 2.1.4 External networks ................................................................................................................................... 10 2.1.5 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 11 2.1.6 Logical roles of the RNC........................................................................................................................ 11 2.1.6.1 CRNC .................................................................................................................................................. 11 2.1.6.2 SRNC & DRNC................................................................................................................................... 11 2.1.7 Mapping between GSM and UMTS ....................................................................................................... 12 2.2 STANDARDS AND USED FREQUENCY SPECTRUM........................................................................................ 12 2.3 MOBILE CLASSES ....................................................................................................................................... 14 2.4 BROADBAND PROPAGATION CHANNEL AND WCDMA BASIC CONCEPT ................................................... 14 2.4.1 Multiple Access Techniques................................................................................................................... 14 2.4.2 Broadband signal and Coherence bandwidth.......................................................................................... 15 2.4.3 Multipath propagation and RAKE receiver ............................................................................................ 16 2.5 SPREADING, SCRAMBLING AND MODULATION .......................................................................................... 16 2.5.1 Spreading ................................................................................................................................................ 16 2.5.2 Despreading ............................................................................................................................................ 17 2.5.3 Codes used.............................................................................................................................................. 18 2.5.3.1 Channelization codes ........................................................................................................................... 18 2.5.3.2 Scrambling codes................................................................................................................................. 19 2.5.4 Example for scrambling code allocation: Cell Search Process............................................................... 21 2.5.5 Spreading, scrambling and modulation .................................................................................................. 21 2.5.5.1 Uplink part ........................................................................................................................................... 21 2.5.5.2 Downlink part ...................................................................................................................................... 22 2.6 USER DETECTION MECHANISMS (QUICK OVERVIEW)................................................................................. 23 2.7 POWER CONTROL IN UMTS FDD.............................................................................................................. 23 2.7.1 General Power Control in UMTS ........................................................................................................... 23 2.7.1.1 Outer Loop Power Control .................................................................................................................. 24
01 010123
Draft 01
C. Brechtmann, PCS APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
PCS/NPL/METHODS
OA, UB, AG, MH, LSP, MG
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE (YYMMDD)
ORIGINATORS
UMTS RADIO NETWORK PLANNING GUIDELINE
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 1/198
2.7.1.2 Inner Loop Power Control for dedicated channels .............................................................................. 24 2.7.1.3 Open Loop Power Control................................................................................................................... 26 2.7.1.4 Site selection diversity transmit power control.................................................................................... 26 2.8 HO TYPES & EVENTS ................................................................................................................................. 27 2.8.1 Hard handover ........................................................................................................................................ 27 2.8.2 Soft handover.......................................................................................................................................... 27 2.8.3 Softer handover....................................................................................................................................... 29 2.8.4 Power control in soft(er) handover ......................................................................................................... 29 2.8.4.1 Downlink PC in SHO .......................................................................................................................... 29 2.8.4.2 Uplink PC in SHO ............................................................................................................................... 30 2.8.5 Reporting events for Soft Handover and measurement reports .............................................................. 30 2.8.6 Filtering EC/N0 measures out of raw measures ....................................................................................... 31 2.9 RECEIVE & TRANSMIT DIVERSITY ............................................................................................................. 31 2.9.1 Receiver diversity mechanisms .............................................................................................................. 32 2.9.1.1 Uplink receiver diversity ..................................................................................................................... 32 2.9.1.2 Downlink receiver diversity ................................................................................................................ 32 2.9.2 Downlink Transmit diversity mechanisms ............................................................................................. 33 2.9.2.1 Open loop downlink transmit diversity ............................................................................................... 34 2.9.2.2 Closed loop downlink transmit diversity for DPCH transmission....................................................... 35 2.10 CODECS SUPPORTED BY UTRAN .......................................................................................................... 35 2.10.1 Fixed Rate CODECs............................................................................................................................. 36 2.10.2 Adaptive Multi Rate CODECs ............................................................................................................. 36 3 CHANNEL TYPES AND RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT ........................................................................ 38 3.1 OVERVIEW ON CHANNEL TYPES AND NAMES ............................................................................................ 39 3.1.1 Physical channels.................................................................................................................................... 39 3.1.2 Transport channels.................................................................................................................................. 40 3.1.3 Logical channels ..................................................................................................................................... 42 3.1.4 Mapping between different channel types .............................................................................................. 43 3.2 THE PHYSICAL CHANNELS ......................................................................................................................... 43 3.2.1 The physical channels in Uplink............................................................................................................. 43 3.2.1.1 DPCH (DPDCH & DPCCH) in UL..................................................................................................... 43 3.2.1.2 PRACH................................................................................................................................................ 44 3.2.1.3 PCPCH................................................................................................................................................. 46 3.2.2 The physical channels in DL .................................................................................................................. 47 3.2.2.1 Downlink DPCH.................................................................................................................................. 48 3.2.2.2 CPICH Common Pilot channel......................................................................................................... 49 3.2.2.3 PCCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel ................................................................... 49 3.2.2.4 SCCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel ............................................................... 50 3.2.2.5 SCH Synchronization Channel ......................................................................................................... 51 3.2.2.6 PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel.................................................................................... 51 3.3 RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 52 3.3.1 Radio Admission Control ....................................................................................................................... 54 3.3.1.1 Admission control for uplink............................................................................................................... 54 3.3.1.2 Admission Control for Downlink ........................................................................................................ 55 4 UMTS SERVICES AND TRAFFIC MODELING ............................................................................................. 57 4.1 UMTS SERVICES ....................................................................................................................................... 58 4.2 TRAFFIC MODELLING................................................................................................................................. 60 4.2.1 Microscopic Traffic Models ................................................................................................................... 60 4.2.2 Macroscopic Traffic Models................................................................................................................... 60 4.3 SERVICE DEFINITION ................................................................................................................................. 61 4.3.1 Circuit Switched Services....................................................................................................................... 61 4.3.1.1 Bit rate: ................................................................................................................................................ 61 4.3.1.2 Radio Quality and QoS........................................................................................................................ 62 4.3.1.3 Grade of Service (GoS) ....................................................................................................................... 62 ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 2/198
4.3.1.4 Microscopic Traffic Model.................................................................................................................. 62 4.3.2 Packet Switched Services ....................................................................................................................... 63 4.3.2.1 Bit rates................................................................................................................................................ 64 4.3.2.2 QoS and Radio Quality........................................................................................................................ 65 4.3.2.3 Grade of Service .................................................................................................................................. 65 4.3.2.4 Microscopic Traffic Models ................................................................................................................ 65 4.4 MACROSCOPIC TRAFFIC MODEL FOR LINK BUDGET ANALYSIS ............................................................... 67 4.4.1 Assumptions ........................................................................................................................................... 67 4.4.2 Concept................................................................................................................................................... 68 4.4.3 Inputs of the Macroscopic Traffic Model ............................................................................................... 69 4.4.3.1 Circuit Switched Services.................................................................................................................... 69 4.4.3.2 Packet Switched Services .................................................................................................................... 70 4.4.4 Outputs of the Macroscopic Traffic Model ............................................................................................ 70 4.4.4.1 Uplink .................................................................................................................................................. 70 4.4.4.2 Downlink ............................................................................................................................................. 71 4.5 ANNEX A: REQUIRED EB/N0 FOR SPEECH SERVICE ................................................................................. 72 4.5.1 Speech 8 kbit/s........................................................................................................................................ 72 4.5.2 Speech 12.2 kbit/s................................................................................................................................... 72 4.6 ANNEX B: REQUIRED EB/N0 FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES ............................................................. 74 4.6.1 CS 64 kbit/s ............................................................................................................................................ 74 4.6.2 CS 144 kbps............................................................................................................................................ 74 4.6.3 CS 384 kbit/s .......................................................................................................................................... 75 4.7 ANNEX C: REQUIRED EB/N0 FOR PACKET SWITCHED SERVICES ............................................................... 76 4.7.1 PS 64 kbit/s............................................................................................................................................. 76 4.7.2 PS 144 kbit/s ........................................................................................................................................... 76 4.7.3 PS 384 kbit/s ........................................................................................................................................... 77 5 LINK BUDGET AND INITIAL NETWORK DESIGN ........................................................................................ 78 5.1 MULTISERVICE LINK BUDGET .................................................................................................................... 78 5.1.1 Uplink Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 79 5.1.1.1 Uplink Iteration Process ...................................................................................................................... 80 5.1.2 Downlink Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 83 5.1.2.1 Downlink Iteration Process.................................................................................................................. 83 5.2 LINK BUDGET PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................................... 87 5.2.1 Input Parameters for Link Budget Process ............................................................................................. 87 5.2.1.1 Service Inputs ...................................................................................................................................... 87 5.2.2 Transmission Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 89 5.2.3 UE specific parameters ........................................................................................................................... 90 5.2.4 Node B Specific Parameters ................................................................................................................... 90 5.2.5 Exemplary Link Budget.......................................................................................................................... 92 6 CELL PLANNING WITH PLANNING TOOL .................................................................................................... 96 6.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 96 6.2 WORKAROUND FOR UMTS CELL PLANNING ............................................................................................. 96 6.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKAROUND USING THE EXAMPLE OF OSTRAVA ................................................. 96 6.3.1 Introduction and Process Description ..................................................................................................... 96 6.3.2 Input Data ............................................................................................................................................... 97 6.3.2.1 Databases ............................................................................................................................................. 97 6.3.2.2 Traffic .................................................................................................................................................. 98 6.3.3 A955 planning step ................................................................................................................................. 99 6.3.4 ILBT4RNP planning steps.................................................................................................................... 100 6.3.4.1 Propagation model ............................................................................................................................. 101 6.3.4.2 Input parameters ................................................................................................................................ 101 6.3.4.3 ILBT4RNP output ............................................................................................................................. 102 6.3.5 Comparison of the intermediate results ................................................................................................ 103 6.3.6 Results & Conclusion of the workaround............................................................................................. 104 ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 3/198
6.4 CODE PLANNING INSTEAD OF FREQUENCY PLANNING ............................................................................. 104 7 ANTENNA ENGINEERING ........................................................................................................................... 106 7.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 106 7.2 ANTENNA TILT......................................................................................................................................... 106 7.3 DIVERSITY ASPECTS ................................................................................................................................ 106 7.3.1 RX Diversity......................................................................................................................................... 106 7.3.2 TX STTD Diversity Gain ..................................................................................................................... 108 7.4 ANXU (ANTENNA NETWORK FOR UMTS) ............................................................................................. 109 7.4.1 Single Carrier Configuration with Transmit Diversity ......................................................................... 110 7.4.2 Dual Single Carrier Configuration........................................................................................................ 111 7.5 MHA (MAST HEAD AMPLIFIER).............................................................................................................. 111 7.6 GSM AND UMTS/FDD CO-LOCATION.................................................................................................... 113 7.6.1 RF Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 113 7.6.1.1 Interference Mechanism .................................................................................................................... 113 7.6.1.2 Decoupling requirements................................................................................................................... 114 7.6.1.3 Receiver blocking .............................................................................................................................. 117 7.6.1.4 Intermodulation ................................................................................................................................. 120 7.6.1.5 Summary on the required decoupling................................................................................................ 127 7.6.2 Antenna System Solutions.................................................................................................................... 127 7.6.2.1 Dual Band Sites ................................................................................................................................. 127 7.6.2.2 Feeder Sharing................................................................................................................................... 136 7.6.2.3 Triple Band Sites ............................................................................................................................... 137 7.6.3 Outlook to the future: Smart antennas (beam-forming)........................................................................ 145 8 PRODUCTS AND MIGRATION STRATEGIES ............................................................................................... 146 8.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 146 8.2 ROADMAP: RADIO ACCESS NETWORK EVOLUTION.................................................................. 147 8.2.1 RELEASE 1: UMTS OVERLAY NETWORK.................................................................................... 147 8.2.2 RELEASE 2: UMTS/GSM NETWORK INTEGRATION.................................................................. 149 8.2.3 RELEASE 3GR3: UNIFIED RAN ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................... 150 8.2.4 What is GERAN? ................................................................................................................................. 151 8.2.5 Interoperability in a multi-vendor environment.................................................................................... 152 8.3 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................ 152 8.3.1 Evolium Node B (MBS V1) ................................................................................................................. 152 8.3.1.1 Possible configurations within one cabinet ....................................................................................... 153 8.3.1.2 Baseband board capabilities .............................................................................................................. 153 8.3.1.3 Radio performance values of MBS V1.............................................................................................. 154 8.3.1.4 Iub interface to RNC.......................................................................................................................... 155 8.3.2 Evolium MBS V2 ................................................................................................................................. 155 8.3.3 RNC V1 ................................................................................................................................................ 155 8.3.4 RNC Evolution ..................................................................................................................................... 156 8.3.5 OMC ..................................................................................................................................................... 156 8.3.5.1 OMC V1 ............................................................................................................................................ 156 8.3.5.2 OMC V2 ............................................................................................................................................ 158 8.4 MIGRATION STRATEGIES RECOMMENDED BY ALCATEL........................................................ 158 8.4.1 Migration strategy recommended for incumbent operators.................................................................. 158 8.4.2 Migration strategy recommended for greenfield operators .................................................................. 161 8.5 ANNEX A.................................................................................................................................................. 162 8.6 ANNEX B.................................................................................................................................................. 164 8.7 ANNEX C.................................................................................................................................................. 165 8.8 ANNEX D.................................................................................................................................................. 166 9 DENSIFICATION STRATEGIES .................................................................................................................... 167 9.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................ 167 9.2 DENSIFICATION STRATEGIES.................................................................................................................... 168 9.2.1 Adding carriers ..................................................................................................................................... 169 ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 4/198
9.2.2 Sectorization ......................................................................................................................................... 169 9.2.3 Adding cells .......................................................................................................................................... 170 9.2.4 Microcells ............................................................................................................................................. 171 9.2.4.1 Microcells and macrocells on the same channel................................................................................ 172 9.2.4.2 Microcells and macrocells on different channels .............................................................................. 172 10 MULTI OPERATOR ENVIRONMENT ......................................................................................................... 174 10.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 174 10.2 ADJACENT CHANNEL INTERFERENCE IN CASE OF UMTS FDD-FDD CO-EXISTENCE ........................... 174 10.2.1 Capacity Loss due to adjacent operators co-existence ...................................................................... 175 10.2.1.1 Uplink case ...................................................................................................................................... 175 10.2.1.2 Downlink case ................................................................................................................................. 176 10.2.1.3 How can it be avoided?.................................................................................................................... 177 10.2.2 Dead zones.......................................................................................................................................... 177 11 MEASUREMENTS...................................................................................................................................... 179 11.1 MEASUREMENTS FOR PREDICTION MODEL CALIBRATION .................................................................... 179 11.2 MEASUREMENTS OF CELL COVERAGE .................................................................................................. 180 11.2.1 Coverage of Pilot Channel in DL Compared to GSM BCCH Channel .............................................. 180 11.2.2 Impact of Service Type on Coverage ................................................................................................. 180 11.2.3 Investigation on HO Gain................................................................................................................... 181 11.2.3.1 Soft Handover Gain ......................................................................................................................... 181 11.2.3.2 Softer Handover Gain ...................................................................................................................... 182 11.2.3.3 Influence of the UE Speed............................................................................................................... 183 11.2.3.4 Influence of the Interference Level.................................................................................................. 183 11.2.4 Investigation on Power Control .......................................................................................................... 183 11.2.4.1 Open Loop Power Control............................................................................................................... 183 11.2.4.2 Closed Loop Power Control ............................................................................................................ 183 11.2.4.3 Influence of the Propagation Environment ...................................................................................... 184 11.2.4.4 Influence of the UE Speed............................................................................................................... 185 11.3 INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 185 11.3.1 Dead zones.......................................................................................................................................... 185 11.3.2 Influence of the Interference Level..................................................................................................... 186 11.4 TRIAL MEASUREMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 187 11.4.1 Co-Siting with GSM ........................................................................................................................... 187 11.4.2 Code Multiplex ................................................................................................................................... 188 11.4.2.1 Test COD1: Orthogonality of Scrambling Codes on Downlink (Intercell) ..................................... 188 11.4.2.2 Test COD2: Orthogonality on Spreading Codes on DL (Intracell) ................................................. 188 11.5 NETWORK ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 190 11.6 QOS MEASUREMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 191 11.7 RECOMMENDED MEASUREMENT TOOLS FOR AIR INTERFACE MEASUREMENTS .................................. 191 11.8 POSSIBLE MEASUREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 192 GLOSSARY/TERMINOLOGY................................................................................................................. 195 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 195
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 5/198
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Document references are given in the chapters!

[21.905] 3GPP specification TS21.905 V3.10 Release 1999 Useful document with explanations for UMTS abbreviations
RELATED DOCUMENTS
These documents give a good overview on the UMTS system. [WCDMA] [INTRO] WCDMA for UMTS, Harri Holma & Antti Toskala, John Wiley & Sons, LTD Published January 2000, ISBN 0471720518 Memorandum Introduction to UMTS Ref.: MCD/TD/BDC/JVPA/UMTS/2000/01
PREFACE
This document gives information required by radio network planning engineers to understand and plan a UMTS network.
SCOPE
This guideline is giving an introduction to the radio network planning related topics of the UMTS system. It is shown what input parameters are required to dimension and plan a UMTS radio network, how the dimensioning and planning is done and what kind of measurements are of interest.
INTRODUCTION
UMTS is the 3G mobile communication system specified by 3GPP. It is part of the IMT-2000 standard provided by the ITU and consists of a WCDMA system based on FDD. A future TDD part is not yet specified by 3GPP, thus not included in this document. The guideline is intended to provide all necessary information required for planning a UMTS network in FDD mode. It is assumed that the reader has already experience in planning other mobile communication systems, e.g. GSM. Each chapter of this document contains its own introduction explaining the aim of the chapter. Find hereafter a short summary of contents of all chapters of the guideline: 1 RNP Process Description
This chapter deals with the overall RNP process. This process is valid for GSM and UMTS. The different steps of radio network planning are given together with input, output and interfaces.
WCDMA Fundamentals and UMTS Air Interface

This chapter gives an overview on the WCDMA technology used within UMTS. Power control and handovers are explained in more detail.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 6/198
Channel Types and Radio Resource Management

The different layers and their according channels used in FDD UMTS are explained in this chapter. Furthermore some aspects of Radio Resource Management like Radio Admission Control are described.
UMTS Services and Traffic Modeling

Contrary to GSM a high variety of services with different requirements are possible in UMTS. These services can be transmitted simultaneously. This requires a deeper understanding of services and traffic modeling to be able to plan a UMTS network accurately.
Link Budget and Initial Network Design

Before doing the final cell planning, a rough dimensioning of the network is done. Therefore a linkbudget tool is used, which is presented in more detail in this chapter.
Cell Planning with planning tool

Starting with an initial design, methods to find a network layout which can be implemented, are given in this chapter.
Antenna Engineering
Things to keep in mind when doing antenna engineering for UMTS with and without co-location of GSM sites are presented in this chapter.
Products and Migration strategies

What products are currently available from Alcatel and what is the Alcatel strategy to migrate existing networks to 3G networks? Here you find the answer.
Densification strategies
There are different strategies possible to increase the capacity of an existing network. They are explained in this chapter.
10
Multi operator environment

Having more than one UMTS operator in the same area may cause interference problems. How to deal with these problems is explained in this chapter.
11
Measurements
Measurements are necessary for a lot of different purposes, e.g. to test the QoS or the propagation conditions of a network. In the early phase of UMTS they are also important to understand the algorithms used for HO. What is interesting to measure and how we can do it is described in this chapter.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 7/198
1 RNP PROCESS DESCR IPTION

The RNP process description gives answers on the question what is radio network planning (RNP). The main tasks included in RNP are bundled in packets. The inputs, contents, outputs and interfaces of each packet are given and explained. In addition the relation of each packet to the existing AIO modules are shown. As this process is the same for UMTS and GSM, a separated document has been created for the RNP process. This document can be found either in the PCS intranet or on DIAMS. Document reference: Intranet: RNP Process Description 3DF 00902 UA00 DEZZA http://aww.rcd.alcatel.com/PCS
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 8/198
2 WCDMA FUNDAMEN TALS AND UMTS AIR INTERFACE

Referenced Documents [UTRA] [25.213] [25.214] [25.101] [25.331] [26.103] [WFI] UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access 3DF 009955 0004 UAZZA 3GPP 25.213 V3.3.0 3GPP 25.214 V3.4.0 (FDD) (Release 1999) Spreading and modulation (FDD) (Release 1999) Physical layer procedures (FDD) (Release 1999) UE Radio Transmission 3GPP 25.101 V3.4.1 and
Reception
RRC Protocol Specification (Release 1999) Speech CODEC List for GSM and UMTS
3GPP 25.331 V3.4.1 3GPP 26.103 V3.0.0
3 Day UMTS training held for ALCATEL in August 2000
[INTRO] Memorandum Introduction to UMTS Ref.: MCD/TD/BDC/JVPA/UMTS/2000/01 [WCDMA] WCDMA ISBN 0 471 72051 8 for UMTS, Holma handover & Toskala, with John OPNET Wiley & Sons 2000,
[OPNET] Study of soft Ref: MCD/TD/SYT/PBL/200816 [SysDesign]
system
simulations,
UTRAN System Design Document Ed.7,
3BK 10240 0005 DSZZA
2.1 UMTS network architec ture The UMTS network includes not only the air interface of an UMTS network, but also the fixed network part with its connection to the core networks (packet and circuit switched). All main elements of an UMTS network and the connection to the external networks are shown in Figure 1.
Uu Node B RNC USIM Cu ME Node B RNC Node B UE RNS UTRAN Node B Iub RNS Iur
Iu Iu-CS MSC/VLR HLR SGSN Iu-PS CN External Networks GGSN Internet GMSC PLMN, PSTN, ISDN, ...
Figure 1: Structure of the UMTS network [WCDMA] The elements shown in Figure 1 are explained hereafter. 2.1.1 UE ( User Equipment) The UE consists of two parts:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 9/198
The mobile equipment (ME) is the radio terminal used for radio communication over the Uu interface The UMTS Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) is the equivalent smartcard to the SIM in GSM. It holds the subscriber identity, performs authentication algorithms, stores authentication and encryption keys, etc.
2.1.2 UTRAN (UMTS Radio A ccess Network) The UTRAN consists of one or several Radio Network Subsystems (RNS) each containing one RNC and one or several Node B: Node B The Node B is the correspondent element to the BTS in GSM. Within Alcatel this part of the network is called the Multi-standard Base Station (MBS), as it is possible to integrate GSM modules as well (not in the early versions!) RNC The Radio Network Controller (RNC) owns and controls the radio resources of the connected Node Bs. The RNC can have three different logical roles: CRNC, SRNC, DRNC. See more details in chapter 2.1.6.
2.1.3 CN (Core network) HLR The Home Location Register is a database located in the users home system that stores the master copy of the users service profile. MSC/VLR The Mobile Services Switching Center and Visitor Location Register are the switch (MSC) and database (VLR) serving the UE in its current location for circuit switched services. GMSC The Gateway MSC (GMSC) is the MSC at the point where the UMTS PLMN is connected to external circuit switched networks. SGSN The Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) is the counterpart of the MSC/VLR for the packet switched part of the network. GGSN The Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) is the counterpart of the GMSC in the packet switched domain.
2.1.4 External networks The UMTS network is connected to two kinds of external networks: Circuit switched Examples for CS networks are: Existing telephone service, ISDN, PSTN Packet switched Best example today for a packet switched network is the Internet
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 10/198
2.1.5 Interfaces It is important to know, that all external UMTS interfaces are open interfaces. This means that theoretically equipment of different vendors can be mixed if it fulfills the standards. Cu interface The Cu interface is a standard interface for smartcards. In the UE it is the connection between the USIM and the UE. Uu interface The Uu interface is the WCDMA radio interface within UMTS. It is the interface through which the UE accesses the fixed part of the network. This interface is the most important one to understand for RNP issues. Iu interface The Iu interface connects the UTRAN to the core network and is split in two parts. The IuCS is the interface between the RNC and the circuit switched part of the core network. The Iu-PS is the interface between the RNC and the packet switched part of the core network. Iur interface This RNC-RNC interface was initially designed in order to provide inter RNC soft HO, but more features were added during the development. Four distinct functions are provided now: 1. Basic inter-RNC mobility 2. Dedicated channel traffic 3. Common channel traffic 4. Global resource management Iub interface The Iub interface connects the Node B and the RNC. Contrarily to GSM, this interface is fully open in UMTS and thus more competition is expected.
2.1.6 Logical roles of the RN C 2.1.6.1 CRNC For each Node B the RNC to which the Node B is connected is the Controlling RNC (CRNC). 2.1.6.2 SRNC & DRNC The Serving RNC (SRNC) for a certain connection is the RNC providing the Iu connection to the core network. When the UE is in inter-RNC soft HO, more than one Iub and at least one Iur connection is established. Only one of the RNCs (the SRNC) is providing the Iu interface to the core network, all other ones are just routing information between Iub and Iur interface. These RNCs are called Drift RNC (DRNC). Figure 2 illustrates the logical role of SRNC and DRNC.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 11/198
Iu Node B SRNC Node B UE Node B DRNC Node B RNS Iu-PS SGSN Node B Iub RNS Iur Iu-CS MSC/VLR Node B UE Node B DRNC RNS Iub Node B SRNC RNS Iur
Iu Iu-CS MSC/VLR
SGSN Iu-PS
Figure 2: Logical role of SRNC and DRNC 2.1.7 Mapping between GSM and UMTS For easy understanding of the new notations within a UMTS network, the correspondent parts of the GSM network are given in the table below. Table 1: Mapping of notations between GSM and UMTS GSM/GPRS MS SIM Um BTS Abis BSC BSS A Gb MSC SGSN OMC Mobile Switching Center Serving GPRS Support Node Base Station Controller Base Station Subsystem Mobile Station Subscriber Identity Module Air interface Base Station UMTS ME USIM UE Uu Node B Iub RNC RNS Iur Iu-CS Iu-PS MSC SGSN Mobile Switching Center Serving GPRS Support Node dito Radio Network Controller Radio Network Subsystem Node B Mobile Equipment UMTS SIM User Equipment (USIM+ME)
Operation & Maintenance OMC Center
In this chapter, the air interface (Uu) part and its terminating devices UE and Node B are investigated in more detail. 2.2 Standards and used fr equency spectrum The ITU-R has produced high-level documents covering the performance, service type, and interworking requirements for IMT-2000. Various international standards bodies such as the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) are responsible for the detailed technical specifications of the equipment required to provide an IMT-2000 compatible service. A number of ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 12/198
different standards are likely to emerge; but they are expected to have sufficient inter-working capability to allow an integrated IMT-2000 service for subscribers. IMT-2000 networks will support five interface standards: IMT-DS IMT-MC IMT-TC IMT-SC IMT-FT UMTS Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) US CDMA 2000 standard UMTS Time Division Duplex (TDD) GSM EDGE (IS-136) standard DECT standard
The four Technical Specification Groups (TSGs) of the ETSI-supported 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) have approved the detailed specification parts of their submission to the ITU-R for the IMT-2000 radio interface standard. This is a terrestrial radio interface specification known as the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN). The UTRAN is based on a Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) air interface.
Figure 3: IMT 2000 frequency spectrum compared to existing PLMN systems In this document we are focusing on the FDD-WCDMA part of the IMT2000 system, the so called FDD-UMTS. For this part, the following band is reserved: UL: DL: 1920 1980 MHz 2110 2170 MHz
As the UMTS carrier spacing is 5 MHz, the available bandwidth for the FDD part provides 12 different channels. Depending on the country these 12 available licenses are given to different operators. An operator gets typically 2 or 3 licenses for paired (UL and DL) frequency bands. This small amount of frequencies is due to the frequency reuse of 1 applied within a UMTS system. The nominal channel spacing is 5 MHz, but this can be adjusted to optimize performance in a particular deployment scenario. The channel raster is 200 kHz, which means that the center frequency must be an integer multiple of 200 kHz. The carrier frequency is designated by the UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (UARFCN). The value of the UARFCN in the IMT2000 band is defined as follows [25.101]: ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 13/198
Table 2: UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

Uplink Downlink Nu = 5 * (Fuplink MHz) Nd = 5 * (Fdownlink MHz) 0.0 MHz Fuplink 3276.6 MHz where Fuplink is the uplink frequency in MHz 0.0 MHz Fdownlink 3276.6 MHz where Fdownlink is the downlink frequency in MHz
2.3 Mobile classes For the terrestrial UTRAN system, the following mobile power classes are defined. They define the maximum output power of the UE [25.101]. Table 3: UE Power Classes
Power Class 1 2 3 4 Maximum output power +33 dBm +27 dBm +24 dBm +21 dBm Tolerance +1/-3 dB +1/-3 dB +1/-3 dB 2 dB
Note: Up to now, only mobile class 4 has been entirely aproved by 3GPP 2.4 Broadband propagatio n channel and WCDMA basic concept
2.4.1 Multiple Access Techni ques In a mobile radio system, the radio channel has to be accessed by a great number of users. A multiple access method has to be used in order to avoid interference in the receiver. The current principles are TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) FDMA (Frequency Division Multiple Access) CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access)
The data signals are modulated with user specific carrier signals. The orthogonality1 of the multiple access carrier signals represents the prerequisite for correctly detecting the data of all users. FDMA uses bandpass carrier signals which are non-overlapping in the frequency domain and therefore orthogonal at any time. TDMA impulse carrier signals are non-overlapping in the time domain and orthogonal at sampling time. CDMA signature waveforms are generated from orthogonal code sequences (e.g. Walsh sequences) or from quasi-orthogonal pseudo-noise (PN) sequences (e.g. Gold Sequences). By modulating the data with the user specific CDMA carrier signals, the original signal is spread over the whole available frequency band.
Orthogonality of two functions g(t) and s(t) is given in the case, that their cross-correlation function is equal to zero 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 14/198
ED MCD
time code
channel bandwidth
Figure 4: In CDMA the different channels are only separated by code 2.4.2 Broadband signal and Coherence bandwidth A signal is called broadband, if its coherence bandwidth is smaller than the signal bandwidth. Coherence bandwidth of a channel is defined as the range of frequency components which experience similar fading conditions. The coherence bandwidth of the channel depends on the local scattering environment. For most practical mobile channels 5MHz is much larger than the coherence bandwidth. Narrow band transmission (<200 kHz) the channel bandwidth is less than the coherence bandwidth. Fading characteristics at different frequency components are identical. For wide band transmission (>1 MHz) fading characteristics of spectral components tend to be uncorrelated In narrow band transmission, when the receiver experiences a deep fade, signal quality is severely degraded High BER However in wide band systems because of uncorrelated fading of the spectral components deep fades affects only a portion of the spectrum Better signal quality Low BER Better robustness to fading
The differentiation between broadband and narrow band signals can also be made in the time domain. If the delay spread of a signal is that big, that the received multipath signals of the next transmitted symbol interfere with the previous symbol, the channel is called a narrow band channel.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 15/198
t0
t1
t0
t1
Figure 5: Delay spreads of broad band (upper) and narrow band (lower) channels 2.4.3 Multipath propagation and RAKE receiver One big advantage of the UMTS system is its capability to benefit from a multipath environment. In the upper part of Figure 4 we can see the delay spread of a broadband channel as used in UMTS. The received energy from the different multipaths of one signal overlaps much less than in the narrow band case. Thus, the different multipaths can be combined by a special receiver technique, called RAKE receiver, to one improved signal. A RAKE receiver has several input paths (called RAKE fingers), where the signal can be delayed by an adjustable time. Selecting the delay time on each finger in that way, that the different multipaths entering the receiver at the same time, the signals can be combined and thus an improved summary signal can be generated. The delay time on each RAKE finger is determined automatically. The number of RAKE fingers is not fix and depends on the considered product. Conclusion: The UTRA system can take advantage from a multipath environment, e.g. dense urban areas. 2.5 Spreading, scrambling and modulation
2.5.1 Spreading The UTRA system uses direct sequence (DS) spreading for both FDD and TDD mode. The principle consists of multiplying the bipolar data signal bi(t) with a bipolar, broad band carrier signal si(t). This signal is user specific and therefor called signature waveform of the user i. The multiplication in the time domain corresponds to a convolution in the frequency domain, so that the transmitted signal is also broadband. The spreading factor SP describes the widening of its spectrum. The equivalent lowpass of the transmitted signals consists of chips, i.e. bipolar impulses of the duration Tc. One data bit of the duration Tb=SP x Tc corresponds to SF chips during transmission.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 16/198
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
data signal bi(t) t
data signal consists of bipolar "bits"
PN signature signal si(t) t
signature signal consists of bipolar "chips"
spread signal gi(t)=bi(t) si(t) t
chiprate = spreading factor bitrate
Figure 6: Principle of spreading Before the data signal bi can be spread, it has to be generated out of the user bits ui and the channel coding bits. The channel coding bits are added to the data bit rate bi. Knowing the data bit rate bi, e.g. 960 kbit/s for the 384kbit/s data channel, the spreading factor is calculated. In this example the spreading factor would be (3840kbit/s bandwidth)/(960kbit/s data rate) = 4. Due to this spreading the signal can be recovered out of the noise and interference at the receiver by de-spreading (auto-correlation). The received signal energy increase compared to the noise and interference in dB is called the processing gain: PG [dB] = 10 x log SF. Thus the processing gain can vary between 6 (SF = 4) and 24 (SF = 256). 2.5.2 Despreading What is the sense of spreading the data signal onto the whole available channel bandwidth? Two reasons we have seen in chapter 2.4.3 Multipath propagation and RAKE receiver: 1. Less fading sensible channel 2. Takes advantage from multipath environment The main reason for spreading the data signal over the whole bandwidth is the ability to extract at the receiver the wanted signal out of the total received power (interference, noise and useful signal) by doing correlation with the known user specific code. This is the main principle of Direct Sequence CDMA (DS-CDMA). Principle:
time code Autocorrelation with known code of channel 1 code time
channel 1
channel bandwidth
channel bandwidth
Figure 7: Extracting the useful signal out of the overall noise
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 17/198
The overall received power consists of lots of overlaid transmitted channels using different codes. The wanted signal is extracted by correlating the whole received signal with the known code of the wanted signal. Due to correlation, the part of the total received signal using the same code as the code used for correlation, will have increased power. At the same time signals using codes different from the one used for correlation will be suppressed. This is leading in the ideal case to an improved SIR in the range of the processing gain PG. 2.5.3 Codes used The spreading of the data signal onto physical channels is done in two steps: 1. Channelization Channelization codes transform every data bit into a number of chips. The number of chips per data bit is the so called spreading factor SF. 2. Scrambling During the scrambling operation a complex scrambling code (real part for the I branch and imaginary part for the Q branch) is applied to the spread signal. The scrambling code is used to identify in UL the mobile and in DL the cell. As this scrambling codes change very often between 1 and 1, they are responsible for increasing the bandwidth. The channelization codes spread the signal to the chip rate of 3.84 Mbit/s, but do not really increase the required bandwidth of the signal to 3.84 MHz. A chiprate of 3.84 Mbit/s is only leading to an required bandwidth of 3.84 MHz in case of altering the sign on a chip by chip basis. 2.5.3.1 Channelization codes Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) codes are used as channelization codes, which ensure that a number of mobiles can share the same RF channel (frequency) without causing unacceptable interference. These codes allow Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) to the shared RF channel (frequency). These spreading codes are of variable length and therefore offer spreading factors between 4 and 256. In that way, different user bit rates can be realized. The codes are mutually orthogonal even though of different length, if they are synchronized. As synchronization is not possible between different mobiles, the orthogonal OVSF codes are not leading to orthogonal signals in UL. In DL they are fully orthogonal assuming a ideal propagation channel, but due to multipaths in real environments, the signals using the codes are not fully orthogonal. Figure 8 shows the OVSF code tree, which is generated by applying at each branch split the rule: Cnew,upper_branch = +Cold+Cold and Cnew, lower_branch = +Cold-Cold
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 18/198
c4,1 = (1,1,1,1) c2,1 = (1,1) c4,2 = (1,1,-1,-1) c1,1 = (1) c4,3 = (1,-1,1,-1) c2,2 = (1,-1) c4,4 = (1,-1,-1,1) SF = 1 SF = 2 SF = 4
Figure 8: Code tree for generating OVSF codes The code tree defines the code length used to provide the specified spreading factor. The higher user data rate services use shorter codes and hence lower spreading factors (and associated despreading gain). A given mobile cannot use all channel codes simultaneously. A channel code can only be used by a mobile if no other code on the path from the specific code to the root of the code tree, or in the sub-tree below the specific code, is used by any mobile. Thus the number of available channel codes is not fixed, but depends on the data rate and associated spreading factor of each physical channel used. For each call, the mobile is allocated at least one uplink channel code, for an uplink DPCCH (see explanation on channel types in chapter 3). Usually, at least one further uplink channel code is allocated for an uplink DPDCH. Additional uplink channel codes may be allocated if the mobile needs more DPDCHs. All channel codes used for the DPDCH must be orthogonal to the channel code used for the DPCCH. As each mobile using the same RF channel uses a unique uplink scrambling code, no co-ordination of the allocation of uplink channel codes to mobiles is needed. They are allocated in a predefined order that exploits the design of the scrambling codes used by the mobile transmitter. The mobile and the network may negotiate the number and length (spreading factor) of the channel codes needed for the call, and the network allocates the necessary codes. 2.5.3.2 Scrambling codes For the scrambling, there is the choice between short scrambling codes and long scrambling codes. The first option is used if there is multi user detection in the base station in order to simplify the correlation matrix computations. In case of single user detection, the second option is applied, for improving the cross correlation properties and to assure a uniform distribution of the interference. The short scrambling code is a complex code cscramb = cI+jcQ, where cI and cQ are two different codes from the extended Very Large Kasami set of length 256. The long scrambling codes constitute of segments of 10ms (=38400 chips) of a set of Gold sequences with period 241-1. What long scrambling code to use is directly given by the short scrambling code. Currently only single user detection is done within the Node Bs, thus long scrambling codes are used. Multi user detection is just an option for the future.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 19/198
Downlink: Each cell is allocated one and only one primary scrambling code. The primary CCPCH and primary CPICH are always transmitted using the primary scrambling code. The other downlink physical channels can be transmitted with either the primary scrambling code or a secondary scrambling code from the set associated with the primary scrambling code of the cell. There is a one-to-one mapping between each primary scrambling code and 15 secondary scrambling codes in a set such that ith primary scrambling code corresponds to ith set of secondary scrambling codes. Hence, according to the above, scrambling codes k = 0, 1, , 8191 are used. The set of primary scrambling codes is further divided into 64 scrambling code groups, each consisting of 8 primary scrambling codes. The jth scrambling code group consists of primary scrambling codes 16*8*j+16*k, where j=0..63 and k=0..7. Uplink: The UL scrambling code is the scrambling code used by UE. Every UE has its specific UL scrambling code. The network decides the uplink scrambling code (UL scrambling code number 0..224-1). No explicit allocation of the long scrambling code is thus needed. Depending on the channel type, different scrambling codes are used, but for all of them there is one relation valid: The UL scrambling codes of PRACH and PCPCH preambles are subdivided into 512 code groups, having a one-to-one correspondence to the scrambling code used by the downlink. An overview on spreading and scrambling code usage is given in Figure 9.
Node B
1 Spreading OVSF (User identifier) 2 Scrambling PN (Cell identifier) Descrambling
UE
DL
Despreading 3 Spreading OVSF (User identifier)
Despreading
Descrambling
UL
4 Scrambling PN (User identifier)
As the codes are sync. within the Node B, Orthogonal Codes are used to provide small crosscorellation To provide a small crosscorellation to unsyncronized codes (from other Node Bs or from UEs), PN codes are used for scrambling in DL. One code for one cell !!! As the UL isnt syncronized, the OVSF codes arent used for spreading because of their orthogonality, but because of their easy generation for different req. lengths! To provide a small crosscorellation to unsyncronized codes (from other UEs or Node Bs), PN codes are used for scrambling
Figure 9: Overview on spreading and scrambling code usage
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 20/198
2.5.4 Example for scramblin g code allocation: Cell Search Process During the cell search, the UE searches for a cell and determines the downlink scrambling code and frame synchronization of that cell. The cell search is typically carried out in three steps:
Step 1: Slot synchronization
During the first step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the SCHs primary synchronization code to acquire slot synchronization to a cell. This is typically done with a single matched filter (or any similar device) matched to the primary synchronization code which is common to all cells. The slot timing of the cell can be obtained by detecting peaks in the matched filter output.
Step 2: Frame synchronization and code-group identification
During the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the SCHs secondary synchronization code to find frame synchronization and identify the code group of the cell found in the first step. This is done by correlating the received signal with all possible secondary synchronization code sequences, and identifying the maximum correlation value. Since the cyclic shifts of the sequences are unique the code group as well as the frame synchronization is determined.
Step 3: Scrambling-code identification
During the third and last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primary scrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identified through symbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group identified in the second step. After the primary scrambling code has been identified, the Primary CCPCH can be detected. And the system- and cell specific BCH information can be read. If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for, steps 2 and 3 above can be simplified. 2.5.5 Spreading, scrambling and modulation As demodulation is the reciprocal of modulation, only the modulation is explained in more detail here. The UTRA system uses QPSK modulation. This means, that one transmitted symbol consists of two bits, one is transmitted with 0 phase shift (I branch, or real part) and the other one with 90 phase shift (Q branch or imaginary part). 2.5.5.1 Uplink part Concerning the uplink physical channels, one can distinguish between the two dedicated physical channels (Dedicated Physical Control Channel, DPCCH and Dedicated Physical Data Channel, DPDCH) and the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) which carries the random access burst. For the QPSK modulation, the DPDCH bits are mapped to the in-phase (I) branch while the DPCCH bits belong to the quadrature (Q) branch. The spreading is done separately for each branch by two different spreading codes cD and cC, which are called channelization codes. Both are then scrambled by the same mobile specific complex scrambling code cscramb which is therefore the signature of the mobile in uplink direction. The in-phase part I and quadrature part Q are then separated again and modulated with the signals cos(wt) and sin(wt) respectively (see Figure 10). The modulation frequency is of course the center frequency of the used 5MHz band.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 21/198
Channelization codes (OVSF) cD DPDCH cC DPCCH Q *j I I+jQ Imag cscramb Real p(t) sin(wt) w p(t) cos(wt) w
Figure 10: Uplink spreading, scrambling and modulation
2.5.5.2 Downlink part Whereas in UL only one branch is used for traffic data and the other one for signaling, in DL both branches are used for signaling and data traffic. This is the reason, why in DL 1920 kbit/s data rate is possible and in UL only 960 kbit/s. To be able to use both branches in DL, the data stream is subdivided and the two bit sequences are mapped to the I and Q branch, respectively ("Serial-to-parallel mapping"). The I and Q branches are then spread to the chip rate with the same channelization code cch (real spreading) and subsequently scrambled by the same cell specific scrambling code cscramb (real scrambling). The channelization codes are also OVSF codes. In the downlink application, they preserve the orthogonality between downlink channels of different rates and spreading factors.
cos(Mt) I p(t) cch Q cscramb p(t) sin(Mt)
DPDCH/DPCCH
SP
cch: channelization code cscramb: scrambling code p(t): pulse-shaping filter (root raised cosine, roll-off 0.22)
Figure 11: Downlink spreading, scrambling and modulation
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 22/198
2.6 User detection mechan isms (quick overview) In Figure 12 the proposed multi user detection ,mechanisms for the UTRA system are shown. Today only the single user detection (SUD) is implemented in the Node Bs. This is due to the huge calculation capacity required for performing multi user detection. More information about user detection mechanisms can be found in [UTRA].
CDMA Receiver
Single User Detection (SUD)
Multi User Detection (MUD)
Interference Cancellation (IC)
Joint Detection (JD)
Figure 12: Possible multi user detection mechanisms in the UTRA system
2.7 Power Control in UMTS FDD Find detailed information on power control in [25.214]. Summary in [WFI] or [INTRO]. This chapter is in accordance with [SysDesign]. This chapter is divided into 3 parts:

General Power Control Uplink PC Downlink PC
2.7.1 General Power Contro l in UMTS Evaluation of measurement reports and sending of power control commands is done by the serving radio network controller SRNC. Unlike in GSM, the power control mechanism in UMTS is not based on selecting appropriate power levels to be used in the transmitter. Instead, the power control mechanism is based on a quality level (the Signal to Interference Ratio) that has to be achieved by transmitting with an appropriate power level. CDMA is very sensitive for what concerns power control: for the proper functioning of UMTS, it is of vital importance to have a good power control mechanism: the signal to interference ratio (SIR) has to be kept at a certain level. If the SIR is too low, the signal of a UE can not be de-spreaded and reconstructed any more. Since all users are transmitting simultaneously, the noise level depends (among others) on the number of users. -> The more interference, the more a cell is congested This means that interference (transmit power of other links) determines the usage and thus availability of free radio resources. A good power control algorithm will optimize the usage of radio resources and thus increase the availability of radio resources.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 23/198
Another very important goal (maybe the most important goal) of power control is to maintain the signal quality on a radio link. Once a radio link has been established, we try to maintain it. There are 2 types of power control:

power control for common channels:
Open Loop Power control
power control for dedicated channels DPCCH/DPDCH and downlink shared channel DSCH: Closed Loop Power control
Closed loop power control is intended to reduce interference in the system by maintaining the quality of a UE-UTRAN communication (i.e. radio link) as close as possible to the minimum quality required for the type of service requested by the user. Closed loop power control is relevant for the physical layer channels that support dedicated transport channels (DCH) and for those that support shared transport channels (DSCH). Closed loop power control consists of two parts an inner loop and outer loop. This chapter is divided into subsections related to outer loop and inner loop power control for dedicated channels followed by open loop power control for common channels. 2.7.1.1 Outer Loop Power Con trol The parameter used by layer 1 for making inner loop power control decisions are determined by the outer loop power control algorithm. The outer loop control function manages the inner loop process by setting the SIR target parameter and the power up/down step sizes. In general, the algorithm for generating the TPC bits can be described with the following rules: SIRest >= SIRtarget TPC command = power down one step SIRest < SIRtarget TPC command = power up one step The frequency of the outer loop power control is typically in the range of 10 100 Hz. 2.7.1.2 Inner Loop Power Cont rol for dedicated channels The inner part of closed loop power control is also called fast power control (1500 Hz) since it is intended to respond to fast variations in propagation characteristics of the radio link (e.g. fast fading at slow or medium speeds) as well as rapidly changing interference conditions. The power control loop is closed because the receiver of the radio signal communicates commands back to the sender to adjust its transmitted power. Fast power control is considered to be part of the physical layer of the UTRA and is performed in the Node B and the UE. The structure of the air interface enables power control commands called Transmit Power Control (TPC) command bits to be sent once per slot. TPC bits can tell the remote end of the loop to either power up by a step or to power down by a step. The decision to power up or down is based on an estimate of the signal to interference ratio (SIR) of the channel. Since SIR is related to the quality of the radio link, the principle of managing the quality of the link is achieved. As closed loop power control is slightly different for UL and DL, more details are given in chapters 2.7.1.2.1 for uplink and 2.7.1.2.2 for downlink. 2.7.1.2.1 Uplink closed loop pow er control Uplink power control in a CDMA system is very important because of the necessity of suppressing the near-far effect. Assuming all mobiles transmitting with the same power, a mobile close the ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 24/198
receiver (Node B) would interfere the signal received from a mobile at the cell edge very strong, while the mobile at the cell edge doesnt interfere the one close to the Node B. This effect is harming all communications of mobiles having another mobile between themselves and the Node B. This is the so called Near-Far-Effect. The uplink inner-loop power control adjusts the UE transmit power in order to keep the received uplink signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) at a given SIR target. The serving cells (cells in the active set) estimate signal-to-interference ratio SIRest of the received uplink DPCH. TPC commands are generated in the serving cells and transmitted once per slot according to the following rule:

SIRest > SIRtarget then the TPC command to transmit is "0" SIRest < SIRtarget then the TPC command to transmit is "1"
Upon reception of one or more TPC commands in a slot, the UE derives a single TPC command (TPC_cmd) for each slot, combining multiple TPC commands if more than one is received in a slot. Two algorithms are supported by the UE for deriving a TPC_cmd. Which of these two algorithms is used is determined by a UE-specific higher-layer parameter, "PowerControlAlgorithm", and is under the control of the UTRAN. If "PowerControlAlgorithm" indicates "algorithm1", then the layer 1 parameter PCA shall take the value 1 and if "PowerControlAlgorithm" indicates "algorithm2" then PCA shall take the value 2. If PCA has the value 1, Algorithm 1 shall be used for processing TPC commands. If PCA has the value 2, Algorithm 2 shall be used for processing TPC commands. (Algorithm 1 and 2 are described in section 5.1.2.2.2 and 5.1.2.2.3 in 3GPP TS25.214 V3.3.0.) The step size DTPC is a layer 1 parameter which is derived from the UE-specific higher-layer parameter "TPC-StepSize" which is under the control of the UTRAN. If "TPC-StepSize" has the value "dB1", then the layer 1 parameter DTPC shall take the value 1 dB and if "TPC-StepSize" has the value "dB2", then DTPC shall take the value 2 dB. The step size for the UL power control is thus 1 or 2 dB. After deriving of the combined TPC command TPC_cmd using one of the two supported algorithms, the UE shall adjust the transmit power of the uplink DPCCH with a step of DPCCH (in dB) which is given by: DPCCH = DTPC*DTPC_cmd.
Outer loop Closed Loop = Inner Loop + Outer Loop
Open loop
Inner loop
Node B
Figure 13: Different UL power control mechanisms
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 25/198
2.7.1.2.2 Downlink closed loop p ower control In Downlink both the inner and outer loop of the closed loop power control are performed in the UE. The UE generates TPC commands to control the network transmit power and send them in the TPC field of the uplink DPCCH. The UE checks the downlink power control mode (DPC_MODE) before generating the TPC command: DPC_MODE = 0: DPC_MODE = 1: The UE sends a unique TPC command in each slot and the TPC command generated is transmitted in the first available TPC field in the uplink DPCCH The UE repeats the same TPC command over 3 slots and the new TPC command is transmitted such that there is a new command at the beginning of the frame. This mode is also called Slow Power control. Its advantage is a higher precision of the TPC command.
Note: DPC_MODE=1 shall not be used in 3GR1.1 because 3GPP specs are not finalized.
The DPC_MODE parameter is a UE specific parameter controlled by the UTRAN. The power control step size DTPC can take four values: 0.5, 1, 1.5 or 2 dB. It is mandatory for UTRAN to support DTPC of 1 dB, while support of other step sizes is optional. In case of congestion (commanded power not available), UTRAN may disregard the TPC commands from the UE. 2.7.1.3 Open Loop Power Con trol The open loop power control is relevant for physical channels that support common transport channels. In the definition of TS 25.214 V3.3.0 this is the UL PRACH. This physical channel is used by the UE for establishing a connection to the network or sending small amounts of data. The Open Loop Power control consists in setting the transmit power by measuring the path loss of the direct link and adding the interference level of the node B and a constant value. Method: On the BCCH, the node-B will indicate the transmit power of the PCCPCH (and also the required SIR). By measuring the received power-level, the UE can find the downlink pathloss including fading. From this path loss estimation and the knowledge of the uplink interference level and the required SIR, the transmit power needed on the PRACH channel can be determined. 2.7.1.4 Site selection diversity transmit power control Site selection diversity transmit power control (SSDT) is another macro diversity method in soft handover mode. This method is optional in UTRAN. Operation is summarized as follows. The UE selects one of the cells from its active set to be primary, all other cells are classed as non primary. The main objective is to transmit on the downlink from the primary cell, thus reducing the interference caused by multiple transmissions in a soft handover mode. A second objective is to achieve fast site selection without network intervention, thus maintaining the advantage of the soft handover. In order to select a primary cell, each cell is assigned a temporary identification (ID) and UE periodically informs a primary cell ID to the connecting cells. The non-primary cells selected by UE switch off the transmission power. The primary cell ID is delivered by UE to the active cells via uplink FBI field. SSDT activation, SSDT termination and ID assignment are all carried out by higher layer signaling
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 26/198
2.8 HO types & events Definition: The list of cells involved in the soft/softer HO is called Active Set. The maximum size of the active set can be defined. 2.8.1 Hard handover The hard handover (HO) is comparable to the HO procedure of GSM. The mobile is always connected to only one base station (Node B). When performing the HO to another Node B, the connection to the former Node B is released. All connections using a FACH channel (Fast Allocation CHannel, without power control and only for short packages) or a DSCH (Downlink Shared CHannel, best channel for packet switched services) must use the hard HO. They can not benefit from soft HO gains. Other hard HO:

Inter-system HO between e.g. UTRA and GSM Inter-frequency HO between different UTRA carriers
Within 3GR1.1 no compressed mode is possible, which is necessary for hard handover. Hard handover and support of DSCH are not included in 3GR1.1. This release is also not offering InterRNC cell reselection in idle mode. 2.8.2 Soft handover Packet switched communications using a DCH channel and all circuit switched communications are able to perform a soft HO. Soft HO means, that the mobile receives the same signal from more than one Node B and its transmitted signal is processed by more than one Node B. The number of Node Bs to which the UE is connected is called the Active Set. This is increasing the number of received multipaths in UL and DL and thus is leading to diversity gain (see chapter 2.8.4). If a Node B is put into the active set of a mobile is depending on the pilot Ec/I0. The general scheme of SHO can be seen in Figure 14. For the description of the exemplary Soft Handover algorithm presented in this section the following parameters are used (AS means Active Set):
AS_Th Threshold for macro diversity (max difference for best signal in AS and candidate signal) AS_Th_Hyst Hysteresis for the above threshold AS_Th AS_Rep_Hyst Replacement Hysteresis ,T Time to Trigger AS_Max_Size Maximum size of Active Set
The following figure describes this Soft Handover Algorithm.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 27/198
,T
Measurement Quantity CPICH 1
,T
,T
As_Th + As_Th_Hyst
AS_Th AS_Th_Hyst
As_Rep_Hyst
CPICH 2
CPICH 3
Time Event 1A Add Cell 2 Event 1C Replace Cell 1 with Cell 3 Event 1B Remove Cell 3
Cell 1 Connected
Figure 14: Example of SHO algorithm
As described in the figure above: If Meas_Sign is below (Best_Ss - As_Th - As_Th_Hyst) for a period of ,T remove Worst cell in the Active Set. If Meas_Sign is greater than (Best_Ss - As_Th + As_Th_Hyst) for a period of ,T and the Active Set is not full add Best cell outside the Active Set in the Active Set. If Active Set is full and Best_Cand_Ss is greater than (Worst_Old_Ss + As_Rep_Hyst) for a period of ,T add Best cell outside Active Set and Remove Worst cell in the Active Set. Where:

Best_Ss Worst_Old_Ss Best_Cand_Set Meas_Sign
the best measured cell present in the Active Set the worst measured cell present in the Active Set the best measured cell present in the monitored set the measured and filtered signal
In Figure 14 three different reporting events are used (1A, 1B, 1C). All standardized triggering events are given in chapter 2.8.5. An example for a possible SHO algorithm is given hereafter:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 28/198
Begin
Meas_Sign > Best_Ss As_Th as_Th_Hyst for a period of ,T Yes
No (Event 1B)
Remove Worst_Bs in the Active Set
Meas_Sign > Best_Ss As_Th + as_Th_Hyst for a period of ,T No
Yes (Event 1A) Active Set Full Yes No
Best_Cand_Ss > Worst_Old_Ss + As_Rep_Hyst for a period of ,T No Yes (Event 1C) Add Best BS in Active Set and Remove Worst Bs from th Active Set
Add Best_Bs in the Active Set
Figure 15: Flowchart of an simple SHO algorithm
2.8.3 Softer handover A softer HO is a soft HO between cells of the same Node B, thus sectors of the same site. As this is not improving the multipath conditions as much as soft HO does, the diversity gain is smaller. 2.8.4 Power control in soft(e r) handover In SHO, the UE has established more than one radio link. This requires special power control functionality to identify the correct power control command. 2.8.4.1 Downlink PC in SHO This is leading to the reception of more than one Power Control command in downlink (one from each Node B in the active set). If at least one of the Node Bs in the active set is sending a power down command, the UE will reduce its output power. It is enough, if one of the Node Bs is received correctly.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 29/198
2.8.4.2 Uplink PC in SHO In uplink, the UE is transmitting only one power control command for all connected Node Bs, leading to the same power up/down steps of all connected Node Bs. If at least one link has good quality (the SIR target is met), the UE sends a power down command. 2.8.4.2.1 Power drifting Due to UL transmission errors it is possible, that not all Node Bs in the active set receive the same power control command. This is leading to power drifting: some Node Bs perform a power up, some a power down. This is degrading the performance of the SHO and should be avoided. Main reason is that the Node Bs detect the PC commands independently and no MRC or selection combining can be done (would cause to much delay). Thus the error rate for PC commands can be higher than for transmitted user data. 2.8.5 Reporting events for S oft Handover and measurement reports To find out the best cell or cells within UMTS, the UE measures the CPICH of all received neighbor cells. The UE is told by UTRAN witch reporting events shall force the mobile to generate a measurement report and sent it to the SRNC. This is different from GSM, where a measurement report was generated at fixed time intervals (480 ms). So by using less reporting events within the handover algorithms is leading to less measurement reports sent over the air interface. In this chapter all HO events defined in 3GPP for intra-frequency measurements are listed. The HO algorithms using this events are not standardized, but have to use reporting events out of the pool given by 3GPP [25.331]. Intra frequency reporting events 1A A primary CPICH enters the reporting range
- A measured CPICH stronger than the best CPICH minus the reporting range - Periodically reporting possible if cell is not added to active set due to any reason (cell addition failure)
1B 1C
A primary CPICH leaves the reporting range A nonactive primary CPICH becomes better than an active primary CPICH
- Non-active means, not in active set yet - Periodic reporting possible if weakest cell is not removed from active set (cell replacement failure)
1D 1E 1F
Change of best cell A primary CPICH becomes better than an absolute threshold A primary CPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 30/198
To additionally reduce the number of sent measurement reports, the system can apply two different features for each of the triggering events separately:

A hysteresis value Time-to-trigger (the event condition must be fulfilled for a certain time before the event itself is triggered)
For each cell an individual offset can be applied to force or delay a the event triggering by adding/subtracting the offset to the measured CPICH level at the UE. 2.8.6 Filtering EC/N0 measur es out of raw measures According to [OPNET] and [25.331] the EC/N0 measurements taken by the UE every timeslot (15 times per 10ms) on the CPICH of a neighbor cell are filtered by the following formula:
Equation 1: Filtering the measurements

Ec/Io
filtered
(n) = F * Ec/Io
averaged
(n) + ( 1 F ) * Ec/Io
filtered
(n -1)
Ec/Iofiltered (n) Ec/Ioaveraged (n) F
The filtered measurement for radio frame n The measurement averaged over the last radio frame n F=(1/2)1/k with k being transmitted by the UTRAN: k=(0,1,2,39,11,13,15,17,19)
As shown in [OPNET] we can convert the F(k) into an averaging period for the measurements. This averaging period of the measurements can be compared to the averaging window size used for averaging the raw measurements in GSM. In the following table, we have the relation for some values of k, F and averaging period Table 4: Impact of parameter F on averaging period
K 0 1 9 11 13 15 17 F 1 0.7071 0.0442 0.0221 0.0110 0.0055 0.0028 Averaging period 0.01 s 0.014 s 0.226 s 0.452 s 0.905 s 1.810 s 3.620 s
Simulations done in [OPNET] are leading to the conclusion that a averaging period of approximately 0.5s (k=11) is optimal for SHO performance. 2.9 Receive & Transmit div ersity In downlink the Node B is able to use space transmit diversity to compensate the missing space diversity of the UE receive path. So transmit diversity exists only in downlink, contrary to receive diversity which is possible in both directions. Find hereafter more information about he different diversity schemes.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 31/198
2.9.1 Receiver diversity mec hanisms 2.9.1.1 Uplink receiver diversi ty Three different uplink receiver diversity mechanisms are possible:
MRC diversity at the Node B due to antenna diversity gain MRC diversity in Softer HO Selection Diversity in Soft HO
Each of the three mechanisms is explained in a separate chapter afterwards. 2.9.1.1.1 MRC diversity at the N ode B due to antenna diversity gain If for one sector at the Node B two antennas are installed, both received signals can be combined by using Maximum Ratio Combining (MRC). This is the so called antenna diversity already known from GSM. 2.9.1.1.2 MRC diversity in Softer HO As Softer HO is the HO between two sectors of the same Node B, the Node B can use MRC to combine the received signals of the same communication of the two sectors. As the antennas of the sectors in the regular case are located close to each other (similar to the distance the antennas of one sector have to each other) the benefit of this additional diversity is quite small. The difference in the received multipaths between the two sectors will not be big enough to benefit from the additional MRC. 2.9.1.1.3 Selection Diversity in S oft HO In case of Soft HO (HO between two cells not belonging to the same site/Node B) the difference in the received multipath profiles is much bigger than in case of Softer HO. One can think, that this is leading to a high diversity gain, but unfortunately the combining of the two signals has to be done at the RNC. To be able to do MRC at the RNC, high bit rates on the Iub interface are required (e.g. 1.152 Mbit/s for a 144 Mbit/s LDD service because of 8 bit quantization instead of 1 bit quantization per symbol). Up to now the require info for doing MRC at the RNC is not transmitted, thus the RNC can only select the better signal out of the received ones (on a frame per frame basis), it can not use the different received signals to improve the received ones. This kind of diversity is called selection diversity. 2.9.1.2 Downlink receiver dive rsity In downlink the UE is the receiver. As the UE has only one antenna for signal reception, no antenna diversity takes place. Due to the implemented RAKE receiver the UE is able to benefit strongly from a multipath environment by applying MRC. As the probability to have several multipaths is higher for big distances between the transmit antennas, most benefit is expected from diversity during Soft HO. For Softer HO the diversity gain due to multipath propagation is expected to be less.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 32/198
2.9.2 Downlink Transmit div ersity mechanisms The aim of transmit diversity is to increase the capacity of the downlink transmission. Indeed, two Rx antennas are usually used in the Node B receiver for RX diversity. It would be also possible to use several antennas in the UE, but this is not expected to be the case, since the extra complexity of having several antennas in the UE would increase significantly the UE cost, weight and decrease the autonomy that is not desirable. Moreover, antennas spatially separated are not possible for small handsets, only polarization diversity would be possible. Transmit diversity aims to replace the missing antenna diversity in the UE receiver by a kind of antenna diversity in the Node B transmitter, thus enabling to improve the downlink performance and to avoid that the downlink limits the cell range. We can group transmit diversity techniques in two categories:
The Open Loop transmit diversity consists in using two techniques:
The STTD (Space Time Transmit Diversity) is a coding in time and space to permit the receiver to demodulate the data without additional complexity compared to the non-diversity case. The TSTD (Time Switch Transmit Diversity) consists in transmitting the signal alternatively on each antenna every slot.
The Closed Loop transmit diversity (feedback mode) consists in weighting the signals transmitted by the two antennas. Contrary to the open loop TX diversity, the UE sends periodically weighting information to the Node B. These weights inform the Node B the how to adjust the amplitudes and the phases of the two transmission antennas. Two modes are possible: feedback modes 1 and 2.
Table 5 summarizes which TX diversity type is allowed on which physical channel type. Table 5: Application of TX diversity modes on downlink physical channel types
Physical channel type PCCPCH SCH SCCPCH DPCH PICH PDSCH AICH CSICH Open loop mode TSTD STTD X X X X X X X X Closed loop Mode X X
Note 1: Note 2: Note 3:
Simultaneous use of STTD and closed loop modes on the same physical channel is not allowed. If TX diversity is applied on any of the downlink physical channels it shall also be applied on PCCPCH and SCH. The transmit diversity mode used for a PDSCH frame shall be the same as the transmit diversity mode used for the DPCH associated with this PDSCH frame. During the duration of the PDSCH frame, and within the slot prior to the PDSCH frame, the transmit diversity mode (open loop or closed loop) on the associated DPCH may not change. However, changing from closed loop mode 1 to mode 2 or vice versa, is allowed.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 33/198
2.9.2.1 Open loop downlink tr ansmit diversity 2.9.2.1.1 Space time block codin g based transmit antenna diversity (STTD) STTD is optional for the UTRAN, but its implementation is mandatory at the UE (and is of course deactivated if UTRAN does not support STTD transmit diversity). The main advantages of STTD include the use of the same orthogonal variable spreading factor (OVSF) code as non-diversity scheme for both antennas. Thus complexity at the UE to despread the signals coming from the two antennas with two channelization codes is not increased. The STTD can be applied on DPDCH, PCCPCH, S-CCPCH, AICH, and PICH channels. The STTD encoding is applied on TPC, TFCI and Data symbols of the DPCH. Then, the DPCCH pilot patterns defined by the standard are encoded and time multiplexed. The same spreading and scrambling codes are used for both antennas. These spread and scrambled signals are transmitted on antennas one and two after shaping by the FIR (emission Filter Impulse Response) and translating in high frequency by the RF part (see Figure 16)
Pilots TPC TFCI Data

ENC INT
Ant.1 Ant.2 Ant.1
M U X
STTD Encoder Ant.2
M U X
FIR
Spread / Scrambling
RF
Ant .1
FIR
RF
Ant .2
Figure 16: Schematic Representation of STTD
The diversity gain provided by STTD is manifested by a reduction of the required received downlink Eb/N0. 2.9.2.1.2 Time switched transmi t diversity for SCH (TSTD) Figure 17 illustrates the structure of the SCH transmitted by the TSTD scheme. In even numbered slots signals are transmitted on antenna 1, and in odd numbered slots signals are transmitted on antenna 2.
Slot #0 acp acsi,0
(Tx OFF)
Slot #1 acp acsi,2
Slot #2 acp acsi,14

(Tx OFF)
Slot #14
Antenna 1
(Tx OFF)
(Tx OFF)
Antenna 2
(Tx OFF)
acp acsi,1
(Tx OFF)
(Tx OFF)
(Tx OFF)
Figure 17: Structure of SCH transmitted by TSTD scheme
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 34/198
2.9.2.2 Closed loop downlink t ransmit diversity for DPCH transmission The aim of transmit diversity is to maximize the received power at the UE. This is done by transmitting the same signal with different amplitudes and phase shifts from two different antennas (of the same site). The optimal weighting factors are determined by the UE and sent back to the Node B by via the FBI field of the UL DPCCH. The general transmitter structure to support closed loop mode transmit diversity for DPCH transmission is shown in Figure 18. Channel coding, interleaving and spreading are done as in non-diversity mode. The spread complex valued signal is fed to both TX antenna branches, and weighted with antenna specific weight factors w1 and w2. The weight factors are complex valued signals (i.e., wi = ai + jbi ) in general, modifying amplitude and phase of the signal.
w1 Spread/scramble CPICH1 Tx Ant1
Ant2
DPCCH DPDCH
DPCH
w2 CPICH2 Rx w1 w2 Rx
Tx
Weight Generation
Determine FBI message from Uplink DPCCH
Figure 18: DL transmitter structure for closed loop mode transmit diversity
2.10 CODECs supported by UTRAN The GSM and UMTS standards define currently six different CODEC Types [26.103]:
Table 6: CODECS supported by the UTRAN
Name of the CODEC GSM Full Rate GSM Half Rate GSM Enhanced Full Rate GSM Full Rate Adaptive Multi-Rate GSM Half Rate Adaptive Multi-Rate UMTS Adaptive Multi-Rate
speech data bit rate 13.0 kbit/s 5.6 kbit/s 12.2 kbit/s 4.75 12.2 kbit/s 4.75 7.95 kbit/s 4.75 12.2 kbit/s
Each of the six mentioned CODECS will be explained in more detail in this chapter.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 35/198
2.10.1 Fixed Rate CODECs For all three fixed rate CODECS, DTX may be enabled in uplink and in downlink independently of each other. DTX on or off is defined by the network on a cell basis and can not be negotiated at call setup or during the call.

GSM Full The GSM Full Rate CODEC Type supports one fixed CODEC Mode with 13.0 kBit/s. GSM Half The GSM Half Rate CODEC Type supports one fixed CODEC Mode with 5.60 kBit/s. GSM Enhanced Full The GSM Enhanced Full Rate CODEC Type supports one fixed mode with 12.2 kBit/s.
Rate Rate Rate
2.10.2 Adaptive Multi Rate CO DECs Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) is a new CODEC defined by ETSI. This technology relies on a set of predefined "CODEC modes", each one providing optimum performance under specific radio conditions. AMR is therefore a technology allowing for the real-time optimisation of the speech coding scheme with respect to current radio propagation conditions. With CODECs such as FR and EFR, the share of throughput given to speech coding and channel coding (speech protection) are fixed trade-offs. AMR is able to adapt the sharing speech information / speech protection (CODEC mode adaptation) to current radio conditions, which can vary in a large scale, depending on location, speed, interference, :

When radio conditions are very good, speech protection is reduced and the speech information share is increased in order to improve speech quality, When radio conditions are bad, speech protection share is increased to always keep the best possible quality.
The CODEC mode adaptation is made up to each speech frame. This adaptation is illustrated in Figure 19:
Figure 19: Functionality of the GSM AMR CODECs
GSM Full Rate Adaptive The GSM Full Rate Adaptive Multi-Rate provides eight data rates in kbit/s:
12.2 10.2 7.95 7.40 6.70 5.90 5.15 4.75
Multi-Rate
GSM Half Rate Adaptive The GSM Half Rate Adaptive Multi-Rate provides six data rates in kbit/s:
Multi-Rate
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 36/198
7.95
7.40
6.70
5.90
5.15
4.75
UMTS Adaptive The UMTS Adaptive Multi-Rate provides eight data rates in kbit/s:
12.2 10.2 7.95 7.40 6.70 5.90 5.15 4.75
Multi-Rate
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 37/198
3 CHANNEL TYPES AND RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Referenced documents [Proc] [Channels] UMTS Radio Procedures UMTS Channels Pascal Pagani (PCS-F) Celine Moignard (PCS-F)
[25.211] Physical Channels and mapping of transport channels onto physical channels3GPP TS 25.211 V3.4.0 (Release 1999) [WCDMA] WCDMA ISBN 0 471 72051 8 [RAC&RLC] [OTC] for UMTS, Holma & Toskala, John Wiley & Sons 2000,
UTRAN Radio Admission control and Radio Load Control. P.Pagani Alcatel/Motorola document: UTRAN System Feature Requirements And Architecture Specifications, FRAS Documents: Part 2: Overview of Telecom Functions, version 1.4 http://slsy1b.stgl.sel.alcatel.de/umts/homepage/ Spreading and modulation (FDD). 3GPP TS 25.213 V3.2.0 (Release 1999) UTRAN system Design Document Ed.7, 3BK 10240 0005 DSZZA
[25.213] [SysDesign]
The UTRA radio interface is layered into three protocol layers [Proc]:

Physical layer (L1) Data link layer (L2) Network layer (L3)
Layer 2 is split into following sub-layers: Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) and Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC). Layer 3 is partitioned into sub-layers where the lowest sub-layer, denoted as Radio Resource Control (RRC), interfaces with layer 2 and terminates in the UTRAN. The next sub-layer provides 'Duplication avoidance' functionality. The higher layer signaling such as Mobility Management (MM) and Call Control (CC) follows a protocol architecture, which is similar to the current ITU-R protocol architecture, ITU-R M.1035. Figure 20 shows a simple overview of the radio interface protocol architecture.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 38/198
CC
MM Layer 3 Duplication Avoidance
RRC Logical Channels PDCP RLC Layer 2 MAC Transport Channels Layer 1 PHY BMC
Figure 20: Radio Interface Protocol Architecture
3.1 Overview on channel t ypes and names In UMTS three different channel types for data transmission and signaling are defined:

Physical channels Transport channels Logical channels
(Layer 1) (Interface between layer 1 and 2) (Interface between layer 2 and 3)
Each of these channel types and the mapping between them will be described in more detail hereafter. 3.1.1 Physical channels Physical channels are channels really transmitted over the air. They are carrying transport channels within their frames and time slots. Find all physical channels in FDD mode in Table 7. Closer investigation of the physical channels is done in chapter 3.2 on page 43. Table 7: Physical channels Physical channel AICH CPICH CSICH Acquisition Indication Channel Common Pilot Channel CPCH Status Indication Channel
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 39/198
Physical channel DPCH DPCCH & DPDCH DL-DPCCH for CPCH PCCPCH PCPCH PDSCH PICH PRACH SCCPCH SCH 3.1.2 Transport channels Transport channels are used as interface between Layer 1 and Layer 2 of the radio network architecture. They are divided into

Dedicated Physical Channel Dedicated Physical Control Channel & Dedicated Physical Data Channel DL- Dedicated Physical Control Channel Primary Common Control Physical Channel Physical Common Packet Channel Physical Downlink Shared Channel Paging Indication Channel Physical Random Access Channel Secondary Common Control Physical Channel Synchronization Channel
Common transport channels Dedicated transport channels Coded Composite Traffic Channels
(all except DCH) (only DCH) (CCTrCH)
What common or dedicated transport channels are defined is summarized in Table 8. There is also a short description of each channel given. The CCTrCH is used to multiplex several transport channels into one new transport channel. This CCTrCH is than mapped to one or several physical channels depending on the required bit rate. A CCTrCH must fulfil the following criteria:

A maximum of 5 transport channels can be multiplexed to one CCTrCH Only transport channels with the same active set can be mapped to one CCTrCH Different CCTrCHs can not be mapped onto the same physical channel Dedicated and common transport channels can not be multiplexed into the same CCTrCH For the common transport channels, only the FACH and PCH may belong to the same CCTrCH.
There are hence two types of CCTrCH:

CCTrCH of dedicated type, corresponding to the result of coding and multiplexing of one or several DCHs. CCTrCH of common type, corresponding to the result of the coding and multiplexing of a common channel, RACH in the uplink, DSCH ,BCH, or FACH/PCH for the downlink.
The reason for using CCTrCHs is to provide a more efficient usage of resources. Due to multiplexing of several channels into one channel and splitting of this new channel into pieces with the right size for fitting into a physical channel, the physical channel are used more efficient. ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 40/198
Table 8: Common and dedicated transport channels Transport channels RACH Random Access Channel
The Random Access Channel (RACH) is an uplink transport channel. The RACH is always received from the entire cell. The RACH is characterized by a collision risk and by being transmitted using open loop power control. The RACH is intended to be used to carry control information from the terminal, such as requests to set up a connection. It can also be used to sent small amounts of packet data from the terminal to the network.
CPCH
Common Packet Channel

The Common Packet Channel (CPCH) is an uplink transport channel and is a extension to the RACH. The CPCH is associated with a downlink DPCCH with special slot format (for fast power control commands transmission and CPCH signaling). Before transmission on CPCH starts, the FACH in downlink is used to provide power control and CPCH control commands. In the physical layer the main differences from the RACH are the use of fast power control (inner loop power control), a physical layer based collision detection mechanism and a CPCH status monitoring procedure.
FACH
Forward Access Channel

The Forward Access Channel (FACH) is a downlink transport channel. The first FACH is transmitted over the entire cell with low data rate. Additional FACHs in the cell can be transmitted over only a part of the cell (e.g. beam forming antennas) using higher data rates. The FACH is not allowed to use fast PC (inner loop PC). It can be used to transmit packet data to the UE.
DSCH
Downlink Shared Channel

The Downlink Shared Channel (DSCH) is a transport channel intended to carry dedicated user data and/or control information; it can be shared by several users. In many aspects it is similar to the FACH, but DSCH supports the fast power control as well as variable bit rate open a frame-by-frame basis. The DSCH can be transmitted only over a part of the cell. It can employ the different transmit diversity modes used by the associated downlink DCH. The DSCH is always associated with a downlink DCH.
BCH
Broadcast Channel
The Broadcast Channel (BCH) is a downlink transport channel that is used to broadcast system- and cell-specific information. The BCH is always transmitted over the entire cell and has a single transport format. The broadcast channel carries information like random access codes and access slots in the cell, or types of used transmit diversity. As it is mandatory to receive the BCH transport channel to register to the corresponding cell, the BCH must be transmitted with relatively high power.
PCH
Paging Channel
The Paging Channel (PCH) is a downlink transport channel. The PCH is always transmitted over the entire cell to be able to initiated a communication with the UE. The PCH is sent by all cells within the location area of the mobile. The transmission of the PCH is associated with the transmission of physical-layer generated Paging Indicators, to support efficient sleep-mode procedures.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 41/198
Transport channels DCH Dedicated Channel

The Dedicated Channel is a downlink or uplink transport channel. The DCH is transmitted over the entire cell or over only a part of the cell using e.g. beam-forming antennas. The contents of the DCH transport channel are not visible to the physical layer, thus the DCH can carry user data and control information as well. The UTRAN will set the physical layer parameters depending on DCH carrying control or user data. The DCH supports Fast power control Fast data rate change on a frame-by-frame basis Soft HO
3.1.3 Logical channels Logical channels are used as interface between Layer 2 and Layer 3 of the radio network architecture. Table 9: Logical control channels Logical control channels BCCH PCCH CCCH Broadcast Control Channel (DL)
System control information is broadcasted on the BCCH
Paging Control Channel (DL)

Paging information is broadcasted on the PCH channel.
Common Control Channel (DL & UL))

A bi-directional channel for transmitting control information between the network and UEs. The logical CCCH channel is always mapped onto RACH/FACH transport channels.
DCCH
Dedicated Control Channel (DL&UL)

The DCCH is a bi-directional channel, that transmits dedicated control information between UE and UTRAN. The DCCH is established during RRC connection establishment procedure.
Table 10: Logical traffic channels Logical traffic channels DTCH CTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel (DL&UL)
The DTCH carries user data. It can exist in UL & DL.
Common Traffic Channel (UL)

A common downlink traffic channel to transfer dedicated user information to all or a group of UEs.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 42/198
3.1.4 Mapping between diffe rent channel types

UPLINK DCCH DTCH LOGICAL CHANNELS DOWNLINK DCCH DTCH
CCCH
PCCH
BCCH
CCCH
CTCH
RACH
CPCH
DCH
TRANSPORT CHANNELS
PCH
BCH
FACH
DSCH
DCH
PRACH
PCPCH
DPCCH DPDCH
PHYSICAL CHANNELS
SCCPCH
PCCPCH
PDSCH
DPCCH DPDCH
Standalone physical channels without connection to transport layer
SCH
CPICH
AICH
PICH
CSICH
CD/CA-ICH
Figure 21: Mapping between logical, transport and physical channels
3.2 The physical channels In this chapter the physical channels will be explained. They are separated into UL and DL channels, chapter 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 respectively. 3.2.1 The physical channels in Uplink Physical Channels in UL PRACH PCPCH DPCH (DPCCH/DPDCH) Physical Random Access Channel
The PRACH is used to carry the RACH transport channel.
Physical Common Packet Channel

The PCPCH is used to carry the CPCH transport channel.
Dedicated Physical Channel

The DPCH is a summary of the two physical channels DPDCH and DPCCH. The DPCCH carries user dedicated control information and the DPDCH carries user dedicated data.
3.2.1.1 DPCH (DPDCH & DPCC H) in UL There are two types of uplink DPCH, the uplink DPDCH and the uplink DPCCH. The DPDCH and the DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed within each radio frame. This is different from the downlink, where DPDCH and DPCCH are time multiplexed on the same branch.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 43/198
The uplink DPDCH is used to carry the DCH transport channel. There may be zero, one, or several uplink DPDCHs on each radio link. The uplink DPCCH is used to carry control information generated at Layer 1. There is one and only one uplink DPCCH on each radio link. Figure 22 shows the frame structure of the uplink dedicated physical channels. Each radio frame of length 10 ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one powercontrol period.
DPDCH Data Ndata bits Tslot = 2560 chips, Ndata = 10*2k bits (k=0..6) DPCCH Pilot Npilot bits TFCI NTFCI bits Tslot = 2560 chips, 10 bits FBI NFBI bits TPC NTPC bits
Slot #0
Slot #1
Slot #i 1 radio frame: Tf = 10 ms
Slot #14
Figure 22: Frame structure for uplink DPDCH/DPCCH The control bits of the DPCCH are explained hereafter. Pilot: The (mandatory) pilot bits are used for channel estimation for coherent detection. By estimating the channel conditions, the receiver in the Node B can optimize its receiver parameters. If the pilot bits on the DPCCH are not sufficient for channel estimation, the CPICH (Common Pilot Channel) bits can be used for support. The (optional) Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) informs the receiver about the instantaneous transport format combination of the transport channels mapped to the simultaneously transmitted uplink DPDCH of the radio frame. The (optional) Feedback Indicator (FBI) is used to adjust the closed loop transmit diversity parameters. The Transmit Power control (TPC) carries in uplink the power control commands for the Node B transmitter.
TFCI:
FBI: TPC:
3.2.1.2 PRACH The Random Access Channel (RACH) is an uplink transport channel that is used to carry control information and user packets from the User Equipment (UE) to the Serving RNC (SRNC). When the UE wishes to send information on the RACH, it listens to the logical Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) of the serving cell to learn the access parameters (and specifically the information controlling the random access channel utilization). Using this access information, the UE initiates sending the RACH preamble. After the UE has completed its preamble transmission on the RACH, it listens to the Acquisition Indication Channel (AICH) to determine if the Node B received the RACH preamble without error. Assuming that the Node B has indicated successful reception, the UE then transmits the message part of the RACH. The UE sets the power level based on parameters received on the BCCH. If the UE does not get a successful indication, it will retransmit the preamble after ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 44/198
using an algorithm to provide a random delay. The Node B accepts the message part of the logical RACH and sends DCCH and User Data to the SRNC and CCCH to the CRNC. The random-access transmission is based on a Slotted ALOHA approach with fast acquisition indication. The UE can start the transmission at a number of well-defined time-offsets, denoted access slots. There are 15 access slots per two frames and they are spaced 5120 chips (2 slots!) apart. Figure 23 shows the access slot numbers and their spacing to each other. Information on what access slots are available in the current cell is given by higher layers.
radio frame: 10 ms 5120 chips #0 Access slot #0 Access slot #1 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14 radio frame: 10 ms
Random Access Transmission Random Access Transmission
Access slot #7 Access slot #8
Random Access Transmission Random Access Transmission
Access slot #14
Figure 23: RACH access slot numbers and their spacing
The structure of the random-access transmission is shown in Figure 24. The random-access transmission consists of one or several preambles of length 4096 chips and a message of length 10 ms.
Preamble 4096 chips Preamble Preamble Message part 10 ms
Figure 24: Structure of the random-access transmission Figure 25 shows the structure of the random-access message part. The 10 ms message is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips. Each slot consists of two parts, a data part that carries Layer 2 information and a control part that carries Layer 1 control information. The data and control parts are transmitted in parallel. The data part consists of 10*2k bits, where k=0,1,2,3. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256, 128, 64, and 32 respectively for the message data part. The control part consists of 8 known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection and 2 TFCI bits. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256 for the message control part. The TFCI value corresponds to a certain transport format of the current random-access message.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 45/198
Data Control Pilot Npilot bits
Data Ndata bits TFCI NTFCI bits
Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2k bits (k=0..3)
Slot #0
Slot #1
Slot #i Random-access messageTRACH = 10 ms
Slot #14
Figure 25: Structure of the random-access message part This structure implies a (small) risk for collisions on the RACH. However, because of the used preamble codes and random scrambling codes used on random access channels, it is possible to have up to 80 random-access attempts within a 10 ms frame. 3.2.1.3 PCPCH The PCPCH is used to carry the CPCH. The CPCH transmission is based on DSMA-CD (Digital Sense Multiple Access Collision Detection) approach with fast acquisition indication. The UE can start transmission at the beginning of a number of well-defined time-intervals, relative to the frame boundary of the received BCH of the current cell. The access slot timing and structure is identical to the RACH. The structure of the CPCH access transmission is shown in Figure 26. The CPCH access transmission consists of one or several Access Preambles [A-P] of length 4096 chips, one Collision Detection Preamble (CD-P) of length 4096 chips, a DPCCH Power Control Preamble (PC-P) which is either 0 slots or 8 slots in length, and a message of variable length Nx10 ms.
P0 P1 Pj Pj
Message Part
4096 chips
0 or 8 slots Access Preamble Collision Detection Preamble
N*10 msec Control Part Data part
Figure 26: Structure of the CPCH access transmission The frame structure and possible slot formats of the PCPCH can be found in [25.211].
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 46/198
3.2.2 The physical channels in DL Table 11: Summary of downlink physical channels Physical downlink channels DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel (DPDCH & DPCCH)
Dedicated Physical Data Channel (DPDCH) and Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) are time multiplexed on the same DPCH. See more details in 3.2.2.1
DL-DPCCH for CPCH CPICH (P-CPICH & S-CPICH) PCCPCH SCCPCH SCH
DL- Dedicated Physical Control Channel

This special DPCCH is always associated with a CPCH for PC and signaling of the CPCH.
Common Pilot Channel

The CPICH consists of two sub-channels, the primary CPICH (P-CPICH) and the secondary CPICH (S-CPICH). Find more information in 3.2.2.2
Primary Common Control Physical Channel

It is used to carry the BCH transport channel. See 3.2.2.3
Secondary Common Control Physical Channel

used to carry to FACH and PCH. See 3.2.2.4
Synchronization channel
The SCH is needed for the cell search of the mobile and consists of a Primary SCH and a Secondary SCH, which are sent in parallel. They are time multiplexed with the PCCPCH. See 3.2.2.5.
PDSCH
Physical Downlink Shared channel

The PDSCH is used to carry the DSCH. A certain code for channelization is given to the PDSCH for one frame. During this frame all slots are allocated to one UE. The UE can change every frame. Different UEs can be code multiplexed, using codes from the same OVSF root during one frame. A UE knows when it has to decode the PDSCH by the DPCH which is necessarily associated with a PDSCH connection of each UE. See 3.2.2.6.
AICH
Acquisition Indication Channel:

The AICH is used to sent an acknowledgement to the UE after correct reception of the RACH. The AICH is not visible to higher layers, thus directly controlled by the physical layer. It has a spreading factor of 256 and consists of 15 repeated consecutive access slots of 5120 chips duration (20 ms frame). 4096 chips are used by the AICH and for the other 1024 chips the transmission is either off, or they are used by the CSICH or other possible future physical channels. See more information in [25.211]
PICH
Page Indication Channel

The Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carry the paging indicators. The PICH is always associated with an S-CCPCH to which a PCH transport channel is mapped. Once a PI message has been detected on the PICH, the UE decodes the next PCH frame transmitted on the SCCPCH whether there is a paging message intended for it.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 47/198
Physical downlink channels

AP-AICH CD/CA-ICH CSICH CPCH Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Channel CPCH Collision Detection/Channel Assignment Indicator Channel CPCH Status Indication Channel
These physical channels have been specified for the CPCH access procedure. They carry no transport channels, but only information needed in the CPCH access procedure. See [25.211], [WCDMA]
Note: Find more information on all physical channels in [25.211] 3.2.2.1 Downlink DPCH The main difference of DL DPCCH compared to UL DPCH is, that the DPDCH and DPCCH are time multiplexed and both are transmitted on I and Q branch of the transmitter (QPSK modulation). Having the same symbol rate in UL and DL, the QPSK is leading to nearly (minus multiplexed control bit rate) doubled possible bit rate for user data in DL. Closed loop power control is used and two kinds of transmit diversity are possible: Closed loop and STTD open loop. Figure 9 shows the frame structure of the downlink DPCH. Each frame of length 10 ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one power-control period.
DPDCH Data1 Ndata1 bits DPCCH TPC NTPC bits TFCI NTFCI bits DPDCH Data2 Ndata2 bits DPCCH Pilot Npilot bits
Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2k bits (k=0..7)
Slot #0
Slot #1
Slot #i One radio frame, Tf = 10 ms
Slot #14
Figure 27: Frame structure for downlink DPCH The parameter k in Figure 27 determines the total number of bits per downlink DPCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 512/2k. The spreading factor may thus range from 512 down to 4. The exact number of bits of the different downlink DPCH fields (Npilot, NTPC, NTFCI, Ndata1 and Ndata2) is given in [25.211]. What slot format to use is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers. There are basically two types of downlink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for fixed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 48/198
3.2.2.2 CPICH Common Pilot channel The common pilot channel is an unmodulated code channel, which is scrambled by the cell specific scrambling code. The CPICH is for aiding the channel estimation for dedicated channels and for providing the channel estimation reference for common channels. Two types of CPICH are defined, the primary and the secondary common pilot channel (P-CPICH & S-CPICH). 3.2.2.2.1 Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) The P-CPICH is used for performing measurements for handover and cell selection/reselection. The Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) has the following characteristics:
The same channelization code is always used for the P-CPICH The P-CPICH is scrambled by the primary scrambling code of the cell There is one and only one P-CPICH per cell The P-CPICH is broadcast over the entire cell
The Primary CPICH is the phase reference for the following downlink channels: SCH, Primary CCPCH, AICH, PICH. The Primary CPICH is also the default phase reference for all other downlink physical channels. 3.2.2.2.2 SCPICH - Secondary Co mmon Pilot Channel A Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) has the following characteristics:
An arbitrary channelization code of SF=256 is used for the S-CPICH A S-CPICH is scrambled by either the primary or a secondary scrambling code There may be zero, one, or several S-CPICH per cell A S-CPICH may be transmitted over the entire cell or only over a part of the cell (e.g. beam forming antennas) A Secondary CPICH may be the reference for the Secondary CCPCH and the downlink DPCH. If this is the case, the UE is informed about this by higher-layer signalling.
3.2.2.3 PCCPCH Primary Com mon Control Physical Channel The Primary CCPCH is a fixed rate (30 kbit/s, SF=256) downlink physical channels used to carry the BCH transport channel. Figure 15 shows the frame structure of the Primary CCPCH. The frame structure differs from the downlink DPCH in that no TPC commands, no TFCI and no pilot bits are transmitted. The Primary CCPCH is not transmitted during the first 256 chips of each slot. Instead, Primary SCH and Secondary SCH are transmitted during this period
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 49/198
256 chips (Tx OFF) Data 18 bits Tslot = 2560 chips , 20 bits
Slot #0
Slot #1
Slot #14
Figure 28: PCCPCH frame structure 3.2.2.4 SCCPCH Secondary C ommon Control Physical Channel The Secondary CCPCH is used to carry the FACH and PCH. There are two types of SCCPCH: those that include TFCI and those that do not include TFCI. It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted, hence making it mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI. The set of possible rates for the Secondary CCPCH is the same as for the downlink DPCH. The frame structure of the Secondary CCPCH is shown in Figure 29.
TFCI NTFCI bits Data Ndata bits Tslot = 2560 chips, 20*2k bits (k=0..6) Pilot Npilot bits
Slot #0
Slot #1
Slot #14
Figure 29: SCCPCH frame structure The parameter k in Figure 29 determines the total number of bits per SCCPCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 256/2k. The spreading factor range is from 256 down to 4. The values for the number of bits per field are given in [25.211]. The FACH and PCH can be mapped to the same or to separate Secondary CCPCHs. If FACH and PCH are mapped to the same Secondary CCPCH, they can be mapped to the same frame. The main difference between a CCPCH and a downlink dedicated physical channel is that a CCPCH is not inner-loop power controlled. The main difference between the Primary and Secondary CCPCH is that the transport channel mapped to the Primary CCPCH (BCH) can only have a fixed predefined transport format combination, while the Secondary CCPCH support multiple transport format combinations using TFCI. Furthermore, a Primary CCPCH is transmitted over the entire cell while a Secondary CCPCH may be transmitted in a narrow lobe in the same way as a dedicated physical channel (only valid for a Secondary CCPCH carrying the FACH).
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 50/198
3.2.2.5 SCH Synchronization Channel The Synchronization Channel (SCH) is a downlink signal used for cell search. The SCH consists of two sub channels, the Primary and Secondary SCH. The 10 ms radio frames of the Primary and Secondary SCH are divided into 15 slots, each of length 2560 chips. Figure 30 illustrates the structure of the SCH radio frame.
S lo t # 0 P rim a ry SCH S e c o n d a ry SCH acp acs
i,0
S lo t # 1 acp acs
i,1
S lo t # 1 4 acp acs
i,1 4
2 5 6 c h ip s 2 5 6 0 c h ip s O n e 1 0 m s S C H ra d io fra m e
Figure 30: Structure of Synchronization Channel (SCH)
The Primary SCH consists of a modulated code of length 256 chips, the Primary Synchronization Code (PSC) denoted cp in Figure 30, transmitted once every slot. The PSC is the same for every cell in the system. The Secondary SCH consists of repeatedly transmitting a length 15 sequence of modulated codes of length 256 chips, the Secondary Synchronization Codes (SSC), transmitted in parallel with the Primary SCH. The SSC is denoted csi,k in Figure 30, where I = 0, 1, , 63 is the number of the scrambling code group, and k = 0, 1, , 14 is the slot number. Each SSC is chosen from a set of 16 different codes of length 256. This sequence on the Secondary SCH indicates which of the code groups the cell's downlink scrambling code belongs to. The primary and secondary synchronization codes are modulated by the symbol as shown in figure 18, which indicates the presence/ absence of STTD encoding on the P-CCPCH and is given by the following table:
P-CCPCH STTD encoded P-CCPCH not STTD encoded a = +1 a = -1
The SCH itself can have TSTD transmit diversity. 3.2.2.6 PDSCH Physical Down link Shared Channel A PDSCH is allocated on a radio frame basis to a single UE. Within one radio frame, UTRAN may allocate different PDSCHs under the same PDSCH root channelization code to different UEs based on code multiplexing. Within the same radio frame, multiple parallel PDSCHs, with the same spreading factor, may be allocated to a single UE. This is a special case of multicode transmission. All the PDSCHs under the same PDSCH root channelization code are operated with radio frame synchronization. PDSCHs allocated to the same UE on different radio frames may have different spreading factors. The frame and slot structure of the PDSCH are shown on Figure 31.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 51/198
D a ta N d ata b its T slo t = 2 5 6 0 ch ip s, 2 0 *2 k b its (k = 0 ..6 )
S lo t # 0
S lo t # 1
S lo t # i 1 ra d io fra m e: T f = 1 0 m s
S lo t # 1 4
Figure 31: Frame structure for the PDSCH For each radio frame, each PDSCH is associated with one downlink DPCH. The PDSCH and associated DPCH do not necessarily have the same spreading factors and are not necessarily frame aligned. All relevant Layer 1 control information is transmitted on the DPCCH part of the associated DPCH, i.e. the PDSCH does not carry Layer 1 information. To indicate for UE that there is data to decode on the PDSCH, two signaling methods are possible, either using the TFCI field of the associated DPCH, or higher layer signaling carried on the associated DPCH. In case of TFCI based signaling, the TFCI informs the UE of the instantaneous transport format parameters related to the PDSCH as well as the channelization code of the PDSCH. In the other case, the information is given by higher layer signaling. The channel bit rates and symbol rates for PDSCH are given in Table 12. Table 12: Slot formats of DPSCH with possible spreading factors
Slot format #i 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Channel Bit Rate (kbps) 30 60 120 240 480 960 1920 Channel Symbol Rate (ksps) 15 30 60 120 240 480 960 SF 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 Bits/ Frame 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Bits/ Slot 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 Ndata 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280
3.3 Radio resource manag ement functions Radio resource management (RRM) is responsible for the utilization of the air interface resources. RRM is needed to guarantee quality of service (QoS), to maintain the planned coverage area and to offer high capacity. Radio Resource Management is split in the following functions:
Power control aims at maintaining the right level of power to and from each mobile. This is further split in closed loop and open loop power control - explained in chapter 2. Radio admission control (RAC) is a CRNC function, checking whether new calls can be accepted with the service characteristics required by the users, and maintaining the quality of already established calls in the cells of that CRNC. It is explained in section 0 of this chapter. RAC itself is part of the Connection admission
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 52/198
control which is split into Call/Connection Admission Control of the ATM network part (CAC) and RAC.
Traffic volume measurement function supervises the user data flow, in order to adapt the allocated radio resource to the amount of data sent. Radio access bearer establishment, configuration and release addresses the procedures of establishment of radio resources. It includes handling of radio parameters. Radio resource allocation and management function is in charge of allocating the channelization codes and temporary user identifiers used in the UTRAN. This includes the problem of reshuffling the code tree, so as to enable high bit rate connections. Radio load control function aims at avoiding radio congestion. The section also indicates actions taken in case a radio congestion situation occurs. Radio channel coding and decoding describes the functions performed in the Node B to cope with the CDMA air interface. Among other, this includes interleaving, rate matching, discontinuous transmission handling, compressed mode handling, and of course, mapping to physical channels. Packet scheduling, multiplexing and retransmission addresses the complex issue of dynamic optimization of resources both in downlink and uplink, in particular the use of common and shared channels. RACH detection and handling is devoted to the resource management aspects related to the Random Access Channel.
Table 13 shows which elements of the RAN are involved in the execution of each Radio resource management (RRM) function. Table 13 Radio resource management functions
Node B CRNC SRNC UE Function
Radio Resource Management a) RF Power control Closed Loop RF Power Control, UL/DL Inner Loop RF Power Control, UL Open Loop b) c) d) e) f) g) h) RF Power Control, UL/DL Outer Loop (= QOS control) Radio Admission Control Traffic Volume Measurements per UE Traffic Volume Measurements on common channels Radio Access Bearer Establishment, Reconfiguration, and Release Radio Resource Allocation and Management Radio Load Control Radio Overload Prevention Radio Overload handling X X X X X X X
X X X
X X X
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 53/198
Node B
CRNC
SRNC
UE
Function
Radio Resource Management i) j) Radio Channel Coding/Decoding NRT Services Scheduling, Multiplexing and Retransmission CH scheduling CH scheduling Scheduling control on RACH AC on DCH k) transmission RACH management CH detection and control CH handling for CCCH CH handling for DCCH and user data CI detection X X X X X X X X X X X X
In this version of the document besides Power Control in chapter 2, only the Radio Admission Control function RAC is explained in more detail. 3.3.1 Radio Admission Contr ol In the CDMA system, since the uplink and downlink are asymmetric, the RAC algorithm is different for uplink and downlink. When the both RAC algorithm admit, the connection can be established. The RAC part is in accordance with [SysDesign]. 3.3.1.1 Admission control for u plink Three types of admission control are desirable to be considered.

Received power admission control Active user based admission control Channel element based admission control
3.3.1.1.1 Received power admis sion control This algorithm is based on the noise rise calculation. The Node B always measures the noise rise. When the establishment of the new connection is requested, the RAC function makes a judgement whether to grant the request by comparing the average actual noise rise in a certain period, assumed increment of noise rise caused by adding the new connection and the threshold noise rise value predetermined. This algorithm is highly reliable because it is based on the actual measurement value. However, it is not easy to precisely analyze the increment of noise rise when the new connection is added because
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 54/198
the increment of the interference from the adjacent Node B, which is caused by adding the new connection in question, should be taken into account. To develop this algorithm, the following parameters will be needed. The actual noise rise measured by Node B The time of period to be used for averaging* The threshold value* The increments of noise rise for every service according to the actual noise rise at a given time* The parameters marked with asterisk should be able to change by software. 3.3.1.1.2 Active user based adm ission control This algorithm is based on the number of active users. The RAC function makes a judgement whether to grant the request by comparing the number of active users assumed after the new connection is established and the maximum number of active users calculated logically. Since there are several services and its capacity is different respectively, the calculation of total number of active uses is complicated. One method is to decide a certain service as the standard, convert the number of active user of the other services to that corresponding to the standard service. This algorithm is the one based on the theory and the result of simulation, and used to complement the noise rise based algorithm which is based on the actual measurement value To develop this algorithm, the following parameters will be needed.

The number of active users of each service in presence The weight to convert the number of active users of a certain service to that of the standard service* The maximum number of active user of the standard service*
The parameters marked with asterisk should be able to change by software. 3.3.1.1.3 Channel element base d admission control This algorithm is based on the number of BB channels. The RAC function makes a judgement whether to grant the request by comparing the number of BB channels used and the number of BB channels available. It is necessary to consider that some BB channels should be reserved for the handover users in the adjacent Node B according to the handover ratio. To develop this algorithm, the following parameters will be needed.

The number of BB channels to be used The number of BB channels reserved for handover user* The total number of BB channels that the Node B has
The parameters marked with asterisk should be able to change by software. 3.3.1.2 Admission Control for Downlink Admission Control for Downlink shall have the three following parts:

Transmit power based admission control Active user based admission control 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 55/198
ED MCD
Channel element based admission control
3.3.1.2.1 Transmit power based admission control This algorithm is based on the transmit power available. The RAC function makes a judgement whether to grant the request by comparing the transmit power available, which equals to the difference between the maximum transmit power and the average transmit power used, and the required transmit power for the new connection. To develop this algorithm, the following parameters will be needed.

The transmit power used The time of period to be used for averaging* The maximum transmit power The transmit power required for the new connection*
The parameters marked with asterisk should be able to change by software. 3.3.1.2.2 Active user based adm ission control Same as uplink. 3.3.1.2.3 Channel element base d admission control Same as uplink.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 56/198
4 UMTS SERVICES AND TRAFFIC MODELING

This chapter is dedicated to the traffic modeling in the network dimensioning approach. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS [Agin_LL]
Summary of UTRA/FDD Link Lever Performance Results, P. Agin,
Ref: TD/SYT/pag/740.99 [SysDesign] UTRAN System Design Document Ed.7, 3BK 10240 0005 DSZZA RELATED DOCUMENTS [Asp] [ETSI] [MND4] [POM]
Theory of Traffic Modelling, Version 1.5, X. Asperge, MND internal document
ETSI document TR101 112 v3.2.0. (1998-04), formerly UMTS 30.03 version 3.2.0.
UMTS Radio Dimensioning Overview, Y. Dupuch and A. Grtner, MND internal document A page-oriented WWW traffic model for wireless system simulations, A. Reyes-Lecuona, E. Gonzalez-Parada, E. Casilari, J.C. Casasola and A. Diaz-Estrella in 16th International Telegraphic Congress, Vol 2, pp 1271-1280, Edinburgh, June 1999 "Probabilits", Jacques Neveu, Script of Ecole Polytechnique, Edition 1997
[MND1] UMTS Radio Interface Dimensioning, S. Joga, MND internal document
[Prob]
The chapter describes the UMTS multiservice concepts including the different service definitions and traffic models. In contrary to second generation mobile radio systems, where one single type of quality criteria designed for speech determines the radio design process, for UMTS a multitude of different bearer services with different quality requirements have to be taken into account. Each service needs a different portion of the available resource, the air interface, dependent on parameters like the bitrate, the maximum delay and the tolerable maximum bit error rate. Additionally, the user activity for different services shows different statistical behaviour which has to be described by according stochastical traffic models in order to judge the expected traffic created by the service mix. Since in a CDMA system the cell range is traffic dependent, reliable traffic models play an important role in the UTRA/FDD radio design. In a CDMA system, a user is only taking resources (capacity) from the network if he is causing interference for the other users, meaning that he is emitting (contribution to uplink interference) or receiving (contribution to the downlink interference). Therefore, even for circuit switched services, where the user is assigned a circuit switched channel for the whole time of the connection, he does not block resources2 when he is not emitting (resp. receiving). Thats why the notion of service activity has been introduced, described by the activity factor. An additional aspect of the UMTS system consists in the multiservice. Due to the fact that users of different services are dynamically using resources from the same pool, there is a certain trunking efficiency compared to a scenario where a given capacity is divided a priori between different
2
except the channelization codes 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 57/198
ED MCD
services. In the latter case, one can dimension the required resources for the different services separately, in the former case, a common approach has to be found taking into account the traffic mix.
4.1 UMTS Services The notion of service is used within the UMTS world with a variety of different meanings. At a first glance, one would associate the word service with the user application, like web-browsing or email. The following list represents an exemplary choice of such service applications: Personal Communications Voice Voice over IP protocol Voice mail E-mail (without attachment) Text / SMS messaging Multimedia messages: Still images, video, text, sound Conversion of media Video telephony / conference Mobile office Internet access, browsing Intranet access, browsing Corporate database access E-mail with possible attachments Rapid File/Data transfer Collaborative working (tele-presence) (tele-work) Agenda synchronisation with PDA Expert on line Remote diagnostics / maintenance (e.g. network administrator) Location based services Navigation services (position) Traffic information (depending on where the car is and goes) Tourist information / virtual tourist guide Maps, images download (e.g. of neighbouring sites) Time table / schedule information (train schedules) Locator services
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 58/198
Fleet management (positioning and follow-up) (fleet management: taxis, trucks) Telemetry Remote health monitoring Remote data acquisition and transfer (e.g. gathering weather forecast data) Remote monitoring & control Remote surveillance / alarm E-commerce On-line banking E-cash integrated in the mobile Electronic ticketing Interactive shopping, delivery Intelligent brokering Information services Yellow pages Push & pull news / information (launching search for information) E-newspaper Health Education, training Entertainment Sports news Interactive games Gambling E-magazines Audio on demand Video-clips on demand However, in order to predict the impact of such a service application on coverage and capacity, other attributes have to be examined. In this context, a service is defined by the following characteristics, which will be explained in detail in the next chapters:

the connection type (circuit switched or packet switched) the user bit rate(s) the required QoS and the related radio quality in terms of Eb/N0 for uplink and downlink the required GoS for this service the statistical behaviour described by the according traffic model and its parameters
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 59/198
4.2 Traffic Modelling It has to be mentioned that the notion of traffic model is used for two different aspect of traffic:
On a first level, traffic model refers to modelling the statistical behaviour of one user using one given service: It gives probability density functions to reflect the user traffic generation. For better distinction, this could be called microscopic traffic model. On a second level, traffic model refers to the statistical modelling of the behaviour of a multitude of users using a limited resource in order to define the necessary resource allocation. Since in the UMTS system, users of different services with different microscopic traffic models are sharing the same resource, an overall traffic model approach is necessary. This overall model is called macroscopic traffic model.
4.2.1 Microscopic Traffic Mod els
Looking at the exemplary list of service applications, one understands intuitively that the statistical behaviour of the resource utilisation is different for each service. For example an active web user clicks once in a while to download a page, generating small uplink traffic and very bursty downlink traffic, leaving blank times in between, which would allow to give the resource to another user at the same time, whereas a video conference user blocks his uplink and downlink for the whole time of the session. However, it seems quite clear that it is impossible to reflect the statistical behaviour of each user of every thinkable service application in analytical or even simulative prediction. Therefore, only a few traffic models are used for analyse purpose, each of them represented by a set of parameters. Depending on the traffic model, one needs therefore a different number and type of parameters to characterise a service entirely. In the course of this paper, one distinguishes between circuit switched and packet switched traffic model. In UMTS network predictions using simulations (e.g. Monte Carlo simulations), the subscribers (which are potential users) of the different services are distributed randomly (according to a distribution function) on a given area. Then, the behaviour of each of them is simulated according to the microscopic traffic model applied for the relevant service, so that at a snapshot in time, the position and number of active users and their service is determined. The following calculations are therefore deterministic, no macroscopic traffic model is needed. Radio Resource control algorithms decide over blocking and delay, so that after a sufficiently high number of simulation runs, blocking resp. delay statistics can be elaborated to decide if the GoS is fulfilled for each service.
4.2.2 Macroscopic Traffic Mo dels In case of analytical predictions, we have to assure that the common pool of resources is sufficient to satisfy the traffic with the required GoS for each service by a macroscopic traffic model, taking into account the behaviour of all subscribers using the different services. The according example for a macroscopic traffic model in GSM is the good old Erlang B law for voice, which produces for a given traffic intensity and number of available voice channels the according blocking probability, resp. gives the number of needed channels to treat the given traffic intensity with a required blocking probability. However, the example is not really applicable since it is dealing with monoservice.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 60/198
4.3 Service Definition
4.3.1 Circuit Switched Servic es The following table gives an overview on the input parameters defining a circuit switched service. User bit rate for the circuit connection Bit rate QoS and Radio quality GoS Traffic Modelling Parameter BER and associated Eb/N0 [dB] per multipath environment for uplink BER and associated Eb/N0 [dB] per multipath environment for downlink Maximum acceptable Blocking Percentage Microscopic Activity Factor for uplink Activity Factor for downlink Session inter-arrival time in sec Session length in sec Macroscopic
Traffic intensity in Erlang within the cell respectively: Number of subscribers N within the given cell and traffic intensity r per subscriber (in mErlang)
4.3.1.1 Bit rate: A circuit switched connection implies a constantly available traffic channel of a given channel bandwidth in both uplink and downlink direction. Therefore, for characterisation of a circuit switched contains only one user bit rate3, which is the effective bit rate (information bit rate) of this circuit channel. The bit rates 64, 144 and 384 kbit/s for circuit switched data and 8kbit/s for speech have been defined by 3GPP as reference bit rates in order to be able to compare simulation results of different 3GPP members. Within a real UMTS system, there is a high granularity of possible user bit rates, so that any other user bit rate together with any other BER requirement could occur. However, it is quite clear that a prediction gets very complicated if one allows this granularity in service, so that in general, service applications are mapped on the above bit rates for prediction purpose. For the product release 3G R1.1 (see [SYSDESIGN]), the following bit rates are intended to be implemented: Speech will be implemented with the conversational AMR (adaptive multirate) Speech Type Conversational AMR Bit rate (Uplink / Downlink) kbit/s 4.75 12.2 / 4.75 12.2
The 9 AMR modes specified in TS26.071 are supported, and the AMR mode to be used can be configured by O&M.
The notion of user bit rate referes to the effective bit rate at RLC level, meaning without error correction or channel codin bits. It is not to be confused with the channel bit rate 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 61/198
ED MCD
Additionally, the following circuit switched service is intended to be implemented in 3G R1.1 Circuit switched data Type Conversational Bit rate (Uplink / Downlink) kbit/s 64/64
This type of service is intended to support ISDN services from CS domain, and a residual BER of 10-6 is thus allowed.
4.3.1.2 Radio Quality and QoS The required radio quality is given by a Eb/N0 target value for uplink and one for downlink. Eb represents the energy per information bit and N0 represents the overall noise (thermal noise, intracell and extra-cell interference) after the Rake receiver. The Eb/N0 is measured in the receiver after the data demodulation. The Eb/N0 target value is required to achieve a certain BER (Bit error rate). The mapping of BER and Eb/N0 is dependent on the particular multipath and propagation conditions, which also depend on the mobile speed, and on the used equipment. This means as those conditions vary the Eb/N0 quality parameter also varies. Alcatel has performed link level simulations which give for speech4 (8 and 12.2 kbit/s) and circuit switched data (64, 144 and 384 kbit/s) for the 3GPP defined propagation environments Pedestrian A and Vehicular A in combination with the mobile velocities 3, 50 and 120km/h the required radio qualities for uplink and downlink [Agin_LL]. The performance is expressed as the average received Eb/N0 required to reach the required quality which was assumed to be a BER of 10-3 for speech service and a BER of 10-6 for circuit switched services. Please refer to Annex A and B for the according result tables. In 3GPP notation, the above mentioned circuit switched data services along with the BER requirement are often referred to as LCD (Long Constrained Delay) data services. 4.3.1.3 Grade of Service (GoS) The GoS for a circuit switched service is generally given in terms of maximal allowed blocking probability in [%].
4.3.1.4 Microscopic Traffic Mode l The traffic model applied to circuit switched services is a traditional birth-death process, also known as Erlang-B-model. It is described by the following parameters:
Session inter-arrival time 1/l (in seconds)
time between the beginning of two consecutive sessions, it is an exponentially distributed random variable.
Session length 1/m (in seconds):
duration of the session, it is also an exponentially distributed random variable.
Speech is a classical circuit-switched service 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 62/198
ED MCD
I n te r - a r r iv a l tim e : e x p o n e n tia l, p a r a m e te r 1 /l a v e r a g e tim e
S e s s io n le n g th : e x p o n e n tia l, p a r a m e te r 1 /m a v e r a g e le n g th
Please note that the traffic intensity per user r which is an input of the macroscopic model, can be derived out of these parameters:
r =
l m
Note that the parameters are identical on both uplink and downlink for circuit services, which is not true for packet services. For the circuit switched connections, where a constant traffic channel is elaborated, an activity factor a can be given. For example for speech which is a circuit switched service, the voice activity factor is around 0.5, which means, that the channel is used only half of the time, because a user talking via the downlink means a listening user in the uplink and vice versa. A listening and therefore not transmitting user doesn't cause interference, which has to be taken into account for capacity calculations. The application of the activity factor is also treated by the traffic model.
Activity factor:
ratio between emitting periods within the session ant the total session duration, therefore probability to emit 4.3.2 Packet Switched Servic es It has to be noted that uplink and downlink must be studied separately because asymmetry may induces strong variations on the parameters between uplink and downlink. Bit rate
Uplink:
Mean User bit rate Peak User bit rate Minimum User bit rate Mean User bit rate Peak User bit rate Minimum User bit rate
BLER and associated Eb/N0 [dB] per multipath environment
Downlink:
QoS and Radio quality
Uplink: Downlink
BLER and associated Eb/N0 [dB] per multipath environment for downlink
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 63/198
GoS
Uplink:
acceptable maximum delay time dULx% and quantile x% (in x% of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dx%.) acceptable maximum delay time dDLx% and quantile x% (in x% of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dx%.)
Downlink
Traffic Modelling Parameter
Microscopic
Dependent on Traffic Model. For page oriented model: mean inter-arrival time mean number of pages per session standard deviation of the number of pages per session, mean reading time standard deviation of reading time minimum page size mean page size mean inter packet time packet multimodal distribution
Please note that only the mean page size is used later on in our macroscopic model
Macroscopic Data Volume per busy hour V (in kbit/busy hour) per subscriber Number of subscriber N 4.3.2.1 Bit rates Packet switched services are normally variable bit rate services and can therefore be described by the mean bit rate and the peak bit rate. Sometimes, the minimum bit rate is given as well. Peak bit rate and minimum bit rate are instantaneous bit rates. The mean bit rate is referring to the average over the transmitting time, meaning that times where the user isnt sending anything are not taken for the average. Additionally, it has to be noted that the uplink bit rate can be completely different from the downlink bit rate of the according service. Alcatel has performed simulations on packet switched services where the bit rate is modeled as being constant in the simulations, but with a lower rate than the peak bit rate (peak bit rates of 64, 144 and 384 kbps are modeled as a constant bit rate of 30.4, 60.8 and 243.2 kbps). This constant bit rate is equivalent to the mean bit rate. Please note that this effective bit rate does not yet include the retransmission rate for erroneous packets. Since BLER of 0.1 (see 4.3.2.2) has been acceptable value in the simulations, a retransmission of 10% of the blocks has to be taken into account additionally when looking at the effective rate for the user.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 64/198
In 3GPP notation, the above mentioned packet switched data services are often referred to as UDD (Unconstrained Delay Data) services. In the Evolium product release 3G R1.1, the following bit rates are intended to be implemented [SysDesign]: Packet Switched Data Type Background Bit rate (Uplink / Downlink) kbit/s 64/128 64/384 384/384
4.3.2.2 QoS and Radio Quality Alcatel has performed link level simulations which give for packet switched services with the peak bit rates of 64, 144 and 384 kbps the 3GPP defined propagation environments Pedestrian A and Vehicular A in combination with the mobile velocities 3, 50 and 120km/h the required radio qualities for uplink and downlink [Agin_LL]. The performance is expressed as the average received Eb/N0 required to reach the quality of service (QoS). The required QoS was assumed to be a BLER (Block Error Rate) of 0.1 for packet switched services. Thanks to the retransmission of corrupted blocks, this BLER is acceptable. The user receives only non-erroneous packets. Please note that the retransmission rate of the packets is not yet included in the above user bit rate. 4.3.2.3 Grade of Service The GoS is given in terms of delay. However, we are not talking about a maximum acceptable delay, since in a packet system, the delay could reach infinity in very rare cases (this would be equal to a blocking of the packet), but we are referring to a percentile delay dx% , which induces that in x% of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dx%. The acceptable delay may be different for uplink and downlink.
4.3.2.4 Microscopic Traffic Mod els There are a multitude of traffic models for the traffic generated by a packet user, mainly depending on the service application. It is intuitive that the statistical behaviour of a web user who asks from time to time for a page is different than from an e-mail user, who is sending e-mails with or without attachment by one click. However, as said already before, the number of different applied traffic models raises the complexity of prediction. In the following, the so called page oriented model (POM) for web-like service is explained shortly. For other models as the ETSI model or the page oriented model for e-mail traffic, please refer to [Asp]. 4.3.2.4.1 The Page-Oriented We b-Browsing Model A three-level structure was created, considering session, page and packet levels based on behaviour of WWW users. The scheme is the following:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 65/198
Session level:
Session inter-arrival time: time between the beginning of two consecutive sessions, it is an exponentially distributed random variable. Number of pages per session: number of web pages browsed by the user, it is a lognormal-distributed integer random variable.
Page level:
Time between pages (or reading time): corresponds to the time during which the user reads one page, it is a gamma-distributed random variable. Page size: the total amount of information in bytes transferred per page, it is a Paretodistributed random variable. Values can be different on the uplink and downlink.
Packet level:
Packet inter-arrival time: time between two consecutive packets inside the same page. Uplink and downlink packets are treated separately. It is an exponentially distributed random variable. Packet size: number of bytes contained in each packet. It is a random variable following a multimodal distribution. Again, uplink and downlink packets are considered separately with two different multimodal distributions. The transmission time of a packet equals its size divided by the transmission bit rate (expressed in bytes per second).
In the simulation, a page must be entirely downloaded before reading: the sum of the sizes of the packets of one page equals the size of the page (all sizes expressed in the same unit, for instance bytes).
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 66/198
S essio n in ter-a rriv al tim e: e x p o n en tial S e ssio n le v el N u m b er o f p a g es: lo g -n orm a l P a g e siz e: P a reto P a g e le v el R ead in g tim e: G am m a law t t
P ack et size: m u ltim o d a l P a ck e t le v el
In ter-p ack et tim e: ex p o n en tial t
T h e su m o f th e b lu e p a ck e t siz es eq u a ls th e y ello w p ag e size (in b y te s)
On the whole, nine parameters (mean inter-arrival time, mean number of pages per session, standard deviation of the number of pages per session, mean reading time, standard deviation of reading time, minimum page size, mean page size, mean inter packet time, packet multimodal distribution) are required to define completely a service. It has to be noted that those parameter are not easily being obtained to fit to a given service application. The page oriented model is suitable as a basis to achieve simulation results, however its far to complex to be applied on a analytical macroscopic model.
4.4 Macroscopic Traffic Mo del for Link Budget ANalysis
4.4.1 Assumptions Ideally the model would be based on the whole protocols stack, and on the admission control and resource management procedures. But it is impossible to fit the reality with a simple analytical model. A resource C (bandwidth for example) is shared between the different users of the different services. A user of a CS service requiring a given amount of resource is only accepted if there is enough remaining resource. A user of a PS service is served if the amount of resource required is lower than the remaining resource, or joins the queue.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 67/198
blocked
no
User CS
C
yes
enough space ? User PS

no
queued
Figure 32: Users sharing a resource C. (no priority; blocking for CS users, queuing for PS users) The only difference between PS and CS services in the model is that the first are queued and the second are blocked when there is not enough resource. This is a simplification because packet handling in an IP network is very different. When there is not enough bandwidth, the packet is not necessarily queued, but transmitted with a lower bit rate. With the described model, a packet can only be sent at maximum bit rate. If the bandwidth is not sufficient, the packet waits.
4.4.2 Concept For the traffic treatment , we are using the property of a CDMA network, that a user is only using network capacity if he is generating interference for the others: In a first step, we determine how many connections of one service we accept at maximum within a given cell, so that in any possible case, the blocking (for circuit switched) and delay requirements (for packet switched) are maintained. This corresponds to the classical reservation of channels for traffic dimensioning. However, the term reservation is deliberately avoided, since a channel is only existing if a user is really transmitting (resp. receiving). One could interpret this calculation as a kind of admission control (for CS) resp. radio resource control (for PS), since already at this stage, we are determining a certain number of calls (according to GoS requirements) are blocked resp. delayed. We are referring to this step as the acceptance step of the macroscopic model. In a second step, we will take into account the fact that not necessarily all of these accepted channels will be on air by treating the number of emitting channels for each service as a random variable. This makes the uplink load as well as the downlink transmit power (which are both dependent on the interference in the cell and therefore on the number of emitting channels per service) also random variables. By setting an according probability threshold, the UMTS service coverage predictions can be executed to cover most of the GoS without taking an unrealistic worst case. This step is further on called the outage step.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 68/198
This approach takes into the trunking efficiency between the different services into account, since the probabilistic contribution of users of different services is maintained until the overall parameters (uplink load and downlink power) are calculated. The overall process is illustrated in Figure 33.
CS 1 CS 2 PS 1 PS 2 PS 3
Acceptance Step:
GoS: blocking (CS) delay (PS)
Number of communications per service, occupation rate
Outage step: statistics of cell load (UL)
x (99%)
of power (DL)
Figure 33 Process of Macroscopic Traffic Model
The traffic model is applied within each iteration of the link budget process (see chapter 5), meaning for a fixed cell radius.
4.4.3 Inputs of the Macrosco pic Traffic Model 4.4.3.1 Circuit Switched Servic es The inputs given to the traffic model for each circuit service k by the planner are:

traffic intensity rk per subscriber (in mErlang) blocking probability5 Pkblock_thr Number of subscribers per sqkm Since within one iteration of the link budget, the cell radius is fixed, this input can be transformed into Number of subscribers of service k Nk within the given cell
The total traffic intensity r within the cell is given by
H = H Nk
Please note that the outage step increases the non-served and therefore blocked calls, so that the probability should be lower than the one given by the operator. An estimation for the combined outage probability is given in [MND1] 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 69/198
ED MCD
4.4.3.2 Packet Switched Servic es It has to be noted that for one service, the traffic parameters have to be given separately for uplink and downlink, since no closed circuit is given. (We may need more channels of the same service in the downlink than in the uplink). So all calculations have to be executed twice, once for uplink and once for downlink. All parameters have to be given for each service k and one determined link. For convenience, it has been renounced to use the indices k, UL and DL for each parameter. The packet switched input we will get for the traffic model from the for each packet switched service k operator are
Number of subscriber per sqkm, from which we can derive within the iteration of the link budget process6 (see chapter 5) Number of subscriber N For the Uplink
Uplink data volume per busy hour VULk (in kbit/busy hour) per subscriber
acceptable maximum delay time dkUL and quantile xkUL % (in xkUL % of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dkUL.) For the Downlink
Downlink data volume per busy hour VDLk (in kbit/busy hour) per subscriber
acceptable maximum delay time dkDL and quantile xkDL % (in xkDL % of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dkDL.)
4.4.4 Outputs of the Macrosc opic Traffic Model 4.4.4.1 Uplink If we know the number of emitting users per service in the uplink, we can derive the cell load and, after a few calculation steps, the minimum required received level of one mobile station of a service k at the Node B, which is the input for the cell range prediction (see [MND1] and chapter 5) The number of emitting users being a random variable, the cell load gets also a random variable. The cell load comprises contributions of all services. A statistical treatment of the cell load therefore allows to treat the trunking efficiency coming from a multiservice environment and the service activity. However, in order to perform the dimensioning, an according threshold has to be defined within the cumulative distribution function of this random variable, in order to derive the dimensioning cell load value. We have to compute the probability density function (pdf) and cumulative distribution function (cdf) of the random variable cell load ~ UL . x
within one iteration of the link budget process, the cell range is fixed 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 70/198
ED MCD
Then, the value of xUL is the value for which P(~UL x UL ) = H. x (H is defined in order to satisfy the GoS requirements, see [MND1]. Figure 34 illustrates this procedure. If we dimensioned at 100%, including all thinkable worst cases, we perform an overdimensioning. By accepting for example only 1% of global outage in the outage step, the dimensioning cell load decreases considerably, which means an enormous gain in cell range standing against an only very small additional outage.
Cumulative density function of the traffic mix
100% 99%
0 Dimensioning point
Cell Load X
Figure 34 Finding the dimensioning point at p=H in the cdf of the cell load (outage step)
The result of the traffic model (applied within the one iteration of the dimensioning process, meaning for a given cell radius) is therefore for the uplink
a determined value xUL for the uplink cell load respecting all GoS requirements
4.4.4.2 Downlink As the uplink cell load, the downlink transmission power PTotDL is calculated in a statistical way. The downlink power does not only depend on the number and type of communications, but also on the location of the according users and the fact if they are in soft handover or not. The probabilistic impact of the users location and the shadowing (which determines the soft handover state) is eleminated by an averaging and weighting procedure (see [MND1]) so that the transmission power then can be given as a random variable which only depends on the traffic inputs.
DL The probability density function (pdf) and therefore the cumulative distribution function (cdf) of PTot can be derived and then treated analogously to the uplink cell load.
The result of the traffic model (applied within the one iteration of the dimensioning process, meaning for a given cell radius) is therefore for the downlink
a determined value Ptot respecting all GoS requirements
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 71/198
4.5 ANNEX A: Required Eb/ N 0 For Speech service Note: Simulation results are constantly subject to change due to equipment and parameters modifications. In order to use the most recent results, please refer to MCD/TD/SYT result documents (see [Agin_LL]) 4.5.1 Speech 8 kbit/s
Environment
Speed (km/h) 3 6 10 7.7 7.9 8.0 8.1 8.3 8.9 9.5 11.1 7.2 7.7 7.8 8.2 8.6 9.1
Uplink
1 antenna
Downlink 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 6.3 7.0 8.5 4.2 4.8 4.7 4.8 5.0 5.8 6.8 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.4 7.6 8.4 10.4 6.5 7.1 7.6 8 8.3 8.5
2 antennas 1 antenna
Vehicular A
25 50 120 200 350 3 6
Pedestrian A
10 25 50 120
Table 14: Rx Eb/N0 required for a BER of 10-3 in speech 8 kbps 4.5.2 Speech 12.2 kbit/s Environment Speed (km/h) 3 Vehicular A 50 120 3 Pedestrian A 50 120 6.9 7.4 8.1 6.3 7.9 8.5 Uplink
1 antenna 2 antennas
Downlink
1 antenna
4.1 4.5 5.2 3.4 4.2 5.0
6.1 6.8 7.2 6.1 7.9 8.5
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 72/198
Table 15: Rx Eb/N0 required for a BER of 10-3 in speech 12.2 kbps
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 73/198
4.6 ANNEX B: Required Eb/ N 0 for Circuit switched services Note: Simulation results are constantly subject to change due to equipment and parameters modifications. In order to use the most recent results, please refer to MCD/TD/SYT result documents (see [Agin_LL]) The mention NA indicates that the result is not available yet. The symbol -- indicates that the target BER cannot be reached for reasonable values of Eb/N0. 4.6.1 CS 64 kbit/s
Environment
Speed (km/h) 3 5.4 6.0 6.9 5.5 7.2 7.6
Uplink 2.5 2.9 3.9 2.0 2.6 3.6
Downlink 5.4 6.1 7.1 5.5 7.8 8.0
1 antenna 2 antennas 1 antenna
Vehicular A
50 120 3
Pedestrian A
50 120
Table 16: Eb/N0 required for a BER of 10-6 in CS 64 kbps
4.6.2 CS 144 kbps Environment Speed (km/h) 3 Vehicular A 50 120 3 Pedestrian A 50 120 4.8 5.4 6.4 5.4 6.8 7.0 Uplink 1.8 2.2 3.0 1.3 2.4 2.8 Downlink 4.6 5.4 6.0 4.57 7.6 --
For these simulations, the channel estimation was performed with the DPCCH instead of CPICH (otherwise, the target BER could not be reached). 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 74/198
ED MCD
4.6.3 CS 384 kbit/s Environment Speed (km/h) 3 Vehicular A 50 120 3 Pedestrian A 50 120 3.72 5.2 6.6
NA NA
Uplink 0.7 1.5 2.2 0.2 1.8 2.3
Downlink 4.58 5.8 6.5 5.01

--
7.3
--
These simulations were performed with 6 fingers for the rake receiver instead of 4 (otherwise the target BER could not be reached). In other situations, the performance gain with 6 fingers instead of 4 is expected to be low (~0.2 dB). 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 75/198
ED MCD
4.7 Annex C: Required Eb/N0 for Packet Switched Services Note: Simulation results are constantly subject to change due to equipment and parameters modifications. In order to use the most recent results, please refer to MCD/TD/SYT result documents (see [Agin_LL]) 4.7.1 PS 64 kbit/s
Environment
Speed (km/h) 3 4.2 4.7 5.6 3.7 4.9 5.7
Uplink 1.4 1.9 2.8 0.8 1.5 2.3
Downlink 4.2 4.7 5.1 3.8 5.4 6.0
Vehicular A
50 120 3
Pedestrian A
50 120
Table 19: Eb/N0 required for a BLER of 0.1 in PS 64 kbps
4.7.2 PS 144 kbit/s
Environment
Speed (km/h) 3 3.5 4.0 4.9 3.0 4.2 5.0
Uplink 0.8 1.2 2.2 0.1 0.7 1.7
Downlink 3.5 4.2 4.7 3.1 5.0 5.6
Vehicular A
50 120 3
Pedestrian A
50 120
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 76/198
4.7.3 PS 384 kbit/s
Environment
Speed (km/h) 3 2.8 3.3 4.0 2.1 3.5 4.2
Uplink -0.2 0.2 1.0 -0.8 -0.2 0.6
Downlink 3.2 4.1 4.8 2.7 5.1 6.1
Vehicular A
50 120 3
Pedestrian A
50 120
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 77/198
5 LINK BUDGET AND I NITIAL NETWORK DESIGN

Referenced Documents [MND1] [MND2] [MND3] [MND4] [A955V6] [TD1]
UMTS Radio Interface Dimensioning, S. Joga, MND internal document Radio Network Dimensioning, Y. Dupuch, MND internal document UMTS Radio Network Dimensioning, A. Grtner and E. Salomon, MND internal document UMTS Radio Dimensioning Overview, Y. Dupuch and A. Grtner, MND internal document A955 V6 Specification: Calculations for Link Budget Based Planning Module for UMTS, A. Grtner, PCS internal draft UTRAN Link budget parameters, N. Billy, Evolium Document, Draft version,
Related Documents
ref. MCD/TD/SYT/NBI/200xxx The chapter gives an overview on the iterative UMTS link budget process. It is not in the scope of this description to deliver the entire set of equations, which are described in [MND1]. We know from GSM planning that a planner has to elaborate a link budget to estimate the expected cell radius in a given environment before starting a detailed radio network planning procedure. In GSM, this link budget elaboration constitutes a relatively simple operation and can be performed manually, since it is dealing purely with propagation parameters. In UMTS, the situation gets much more complex and an iterative tool is needed to perform the cell range analysis. This is due to the fact that in CDMA, the cell radius depends on the traffic. Taking the uplink as an example, as the number of users or offered traffic load increases, the total noise at the Base Station increases. Interference from other users in CDMA can be thought of as noise to a reference user. If the reference user is already using the maximum allowed power on the uplink, too many users at the cell will cause the reference users signal to be received with an insufficient margin above the noise level at the Base Station. This phenomenon leads to the reference user no longer being covered by the Base Station, or in essence, a reduction in the coverage area of a cell. This dependence of the cell coverage radius on the loading can lead to an iterative procedure to balance the coverage radius with the offered traffic. 5.1 Multiservice link budg et The link budget is a key element in the dimensioning process. It is used to derive the maximum allowable path loss and therefore the cell radius. This section introduces the concept implemented in the tool AIRMUST [MND1] that allows to analyze and to bring a solution for the Uplink and Downlink. Both uplink and downlink analysis will result in a cell range value. The final cell range of the overall process is the smaller of the two. If this is the uplink range, the system is uplink limited, if its the downlink range, the system is downlink limited. For the dimensioning, a completely homogenous network with a hexagonal cell structure, a homogenous morphostructure, flat topographical environment and homogenous user distribution are assumed. Therefore, one cell is representative for the whole network, meaning that all parameters are valid for all cells. However, impact from other cells (interference, soft handover) is taken into account. In the following, both the uplink iteration process and the downlink iteration process are described ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 78/198
as an overview. If the reader is interested in the equations behind each step, he should refer to [MND1].
5.1.1 Uplink Analysis A link budget is conventionally performed for one mobile located at the edge of the cell and therefore transmitting at maximal power. Since in a multiservice environment, there are different types of mobiles with different service characteristics, the link budget has to be elaborated for one mobile of each service type. The main target of the uplink is to figure out the increase of the interference level due to the traffic available in the cell. The curve below shows the relation between the traffic load (in per cent) and the interference level (noise rise in dB). The point where the interference goes to infinity is called the pole capacity. The cell load is giving a percentage of air interface loading relational to that pole capacity.
Noise rise (dB) 25.00 20.00 15.00 10.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 Interference curve
20.00
40.00 Load
60.00
80.00
100.00
Figure 35 Interference noise rise over cell load
The interference in a cell depends on the thermal noise, on narrow band and wide band interference from another system, other users in the same cell and users from all the others cells. The intra-cell interference perceived by a mobile in the uplink is independent of the location of the other mobiles thanks to an effective power control, so that for the uplink link budget elaboration the mobile distribution is not relevant. Once the level of interference has been calculated, the next step is to calculate the maximum allowable path loss (MAPL) in order to derive the cell radius. For a given cell load, the uplink maximal allowable pathloss for a service i depends on its Eb/N0 requirements, its user bit rate and the maximal mobile transmitting power for this service. This means that in general, one will obtain different uplink coverage ranges for the different service types. By adjusting the mobile transmitting power, different coverage scenarios can be achieved. Service specific gains, losses and margins have to be integrated if not all mobiles are suffering from the same losses and taking advantage of the same gains, and/or if different margins are applied to different services. This can be the case e.g. for soft handover gains as well as body losses and even penetration margins, see section 5.2.1.1 for exemplary values. The strategy adopted in the dimensioning of the uplink is to provide one common cell boundary. Hence depending on the type of service proposed and the volume of traffic associated, the idea is to find the limiting service (i.e. the service which reach its maximum power capabilities) and then match all the other UE power to this service limiting cell range
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 79/198
5.1.1.1 Uplink Iteration Proces s The iteration is started by assuming an interference noise rise value within the cell of i0dB=3dB to be generated by the total traffic within the cell. For this fixed value, a link budget for each service can be calculated, assuming a reference user i of the according service transmitting with maximum UE power (which places him virtually at the edge of the cell). This is done by calculating according to Equation 2 the minimum required level for this service at the Node B and by applying all relevant gains, margins and losses on the maximum mobile transmit power in order to deduce the maximum allowable path loss (MAPL), shown in Equation 3. The sensitivity has to be calculated for a reference user i of each service k:
Required_leveli = NF + 10log(N0) + 10log(i0i)+ 10log[(Eb/N0)k]+ 10log(Rk)

Equation 2: Uplink minimum required level for a user i using service k
Where:
Required_level
Required level in dBm Thermal noise density 10log(N0)=-174dBm/Hz (valid at 20C equal to 293K)
N0
E b No k
service k required Eb/N0 (non-logarithmic figure) Note:

Eb No kdB
=10log[(Eb/N0)k]
Rk: NF
i0i
Service k bit rate Node B Noise figure in dB (NF is sometimes also referred to as noise factor. ) noise rise due to interference (non logarithmic figure) Note: i0dB=10log(i0i)
For the maximum allowable pathloss, we get: MAPLi = PkUL Required_Leveli5Losses - 5 Margins + 5 Gains
Equation 3: Uplink MAPL for user i using service k
where PkUL is the mobile power valid for service k (in dBm) and Losses, Margins and Gains are given in dB. The smallest MAPL of all services is then chosen as the limiting one. (Taking this MAPL as the dimensioning one implies that the other services wont emit at maximum power) Applying a propagation model (e. g. the well known Hata formula), one can derive the according cell range. Now, for each service, the traffic (number of subscribers for each service) per cell can be deduced, since the number of subscriber per sqkm is known. Applying the traffic model described in detail in chapter 4 for circuit switched and packet switched services, one can derive in the acceptance step the number of reserved channels per service as well as their occupancy probability. In the outage step of the traffic model, the uplink cell load xUL is calculated in a statistical way. The cell load is treated as a random variable: ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 80/198
~ UL = 1 + f UL B x k
k =1
. 1+ .
Eb
*UL RUL k No k Rc *UL RUL Eb k No k Rc
Where:
fUL Bk
E b No k
other cell to same cell interference ratio for Uplink
Random variable: number of emitting channels of service k

: service k required Eb/N0 Service k bit rate Chip rate Number of services
Rk: Rc:
K:
Following the traffic model, the probability density function (pdf) and the cumulative distribution function (cdf) of the cell load can be derived. The dimensioning point (e.g. 99%) is chosen, and the cell load xUL is derived at this point out of the cdf. Please refer to chapter 4 for more details on this process. Once the cell load is determined, the according interference noise rise can be derived.
i io =
1 (1- xUL).(1+
.
Eb No k
RUL k
Rc )
Equation 4: Uplink noise rise due to interference perceived by user i of service k
Please note that the perceived interference is different for users of different services. Therefore, the limiting service has to be detected in each iteration. In case we have n carriers, the cell load is assumed to be divided equally between the carriers, so that each of them treats a cell load of xUL/n. Since we are looking at one carrier by the equations, we have to replace xUL by xUL/n in Equation 4. We are now at the end of one iteration step and have to compare the interference value with the previous value. If the difference between the values is not small enough to be in a defined convergence interval , we have to redo the above calculations with a new interference value. In case of convergence, the radius calculated in the last iteration step is our uplink determined cell radius, which remains to be compared with the downlink determined radius, in order to find the limiting one. Figure 35 visualizes the uplink iteration process.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 81/198
Assumption for interference: Ico=3dB
Calculate UL cell range with Max UE power for all services
Choose limiting cell range
Deduce mean traffic per cell (knowing nb of sub/sqkm)
Application of macroscopic traffic and cell load calculation XUL (e.g.@99%)
Interference calculation Ic=f(XUL)
NO Adapt Ic
Comparison with previous interference value. Convergence?
YES
Current cell radius is UL cell radius
Figure 36 Uplink Iteration Process
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 82/198
5.1.2 Downlink Analysis One of the main target of the downlink analysis consists in finding the maximum number of mobile that can be connected to the base station with a good quality of service. However, contrary to the uplink analysis, for the downlink the position of the users has to be known, since the distance from the base station impacts the power share allocated to the mobile and hence both intracell and extracell interference.
5.1.2.1 Downlink Iteration Pro cess Intuitively, one would assume a uniform distribution of users. In the dimensioning approach, this uniform distribution is approximated by a distribution of the users on concentric rings around the base station. In the following, the outline of the procedure is given: As a starting point in the iteration, a cell range R is assumed. If the total emitted power of the node B is known, the received power that a mobile of a certain service j would require at a given distance r from the node B can be calculated:
Pj (r ) = a j (r ) Ptot + b j (r )
Equation 5 Required power for a mobile of service j at location r
with
C I j G + f (r ) a j (r ) = 1 + G C I j C b (r ) = I j N F W Attenuation 0 g , l & m (r ) j 1 + G C I j
where f(r) (C/I)j other cell to same cell interference ratio at location r for downlink required C/I for service j C/I depends on Eb/N0 in the following way, depending on SHO status (in
non-logarithmic figures:
C I =
j j
Eb
DL R DL j No j Rc
for mobiles not in SHO
C I =
G
Eb
DL R DL j Rc No j
1 SHO _ gain
for mobiles in SHO
(SHO_gain is the gain on the required Eb/N0 given in non-logarithmic figures)

orthogonality factor Thermal Noise
N0 F ED MCD 02
Downlink Noise Factor (non-logarithmic) RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 83/198
W and
Bandwidth
Attenuationg,l&m(r) contains the pathloss attenuation according to Hata and all gains, losses and margins
As a starting value for calculations, we can take for Ptot the maximum available power. It has to adapted in each iteration. As you can see above, the required power depends on the handover status of the mobile. Weighting the resulting power values with the corresponding distribution and taking into account mobiles being in SHO and mobiles not being in SHO is resulting for a given location in a received power per user per service. Now, we can perform an averaging over all mobiles of each service j connected to our node B, and get a mean required power Pj for a user of service j. (For the weighting and averaging procedure, please refer to [MND1]). The mean transmitted power has to be calculated also for the common channels SCH and CPICH. Since we have assumed a cell range, we can derive by our traffic model (see chapter 4) base station power distribution. As shown in chapter 4, the total required power at the node B is a random variable: This random variable can be described by its pdf and cdf. Keep in mind that we are looking in this context only at the statistic power variations due to traffic whereas the power variations due to propagation (shadowing, fading) are treated by margins in the power calculations. In the cdf (which is only valid for the assumed cell range), there are now two possibilities: Case 1: The 100% are reached already below the maximum allowed power (which is in general 43dBm for one carrier). This means that the maximum available power is never required and we have still unused power resources, so that we can increase the cell radius and start the next iteration step. Figure 37 shows an example for this case.
100 %
cdf of DL power
Power in dBm 40dB (<43dB!)
Figure 37 Example for power cdf: 100% value is reached for a value lower than the max. DL power
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 84/198
Case 2: A probability value lower than 100% corresponds to the maximum allowed power. This value is compared to a target value for this probability (e.g. 99%) which we had fixed beforehand. If the target value is not yet reached, we redo the iteration with a smaller cell range. If the value already converged to our target value, the current radius is our downlink radius
100 % 75%<<99%
cdf of DL power
0 43dBm
Power in dBm
Figure 38 Example for power cdf: max. DL power corresponds to a value lower than 100%
In other words: we are checking if the power value at 99% is equal to our 43dBm. If not, we have to adapt the radius accordingly and redo the iteration process until this is the case. In the case that we have more than one carrier, we have to increase the available power accordingly. E.g. for two carriers, we are assuming within the calculations to have an equivalent power of 46dBm. However, the calculations change since the power for the common channels is needed in each of the carriers, so that it has to be counted n times for n carriers. Figure 39 shows the downlink process schematically. If we have found the uplink radius being the limiting one, we can derive for the downlink by the same process the actual transmit power for this radius at the 99% point (this has been done in the exemplary link budget of chapter 5.2.5. in which you will find a total DL transmit power of 41.3 dBm, which is lower than the maximum available power of 43 dBm) Please keep in mind that, although this procedure does not seem to be too complicate, the equations and calculations behind are very complex. Additionally, we need as an input previous simulative results for the soft handover probabilities and the extracell interference factor at each examined location.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 85/198
Assumption of cell range R
Power calculation for one user of each service at each position
Deduce the mean power per user per service
Calculate the cdf of the total power P to t applying the macroscopic traffic model
Calculation of P to t at 99% according to the traffic model
Adapt cell range
NO
P to t @ 99% equal to maximum allowed power?
YES Current cell range is DL cell range
Figure 39 Downlink Iteration Process
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 86/198
5.2 Link Budget Paramete rs
5.2.1 Input Parameters for L ink Budget Process 5.2.1.1 Service Inputs 5.2.1.1.1 Circuit Switched Servic es The parameters characterizing a circuit switched service have been defined in detail in chapter 4. Table 22 recalls those parameters needed as an input for the link budget process for each circuit switched service. User bit rate for the circuit connection Bit rate QoS and Radio quality Eb/N0 [dB] for uplink Eb/N0 [dB] for downlink Note that we have to chose one multipath environment for the link budget GoS Traffic Modelling Parameter Maximum acceptable Blocking Percentage Microscopic Activity Factor for uplink Activity Factor for downlink Macroscopic

Number of subscribers per sqkm traffic intensity r per subscriber (in mErlang)
respectively Volume in kbit per busy hour
Table 22 Description of circuit switched service parameters
In addition, we have to provide the information, if soft handover is used (this wouldnt be the case if DSCH9 channels are used, which is theoretically possible, even if it does not make a lot of sense for circuit switched services). For the SHO case, we have to give the according soft handover gain. For each service, a penetration margin and a body loss have to be defined. It is considered, that there is no body loss with a mobile being held away from the body, which is true for most data applications. Therefore a margin of 3 dB is taken only for speech application and 0 dB for all the other services. Table 23 gives a list of the required input parameters along with exemplary values for two services (speech 12.2 kbit/s and circuit switched data 64 kbit/s)
DCH (Dedicated channel) means one code per connection, DSCH (Downlink Shared Channel) means sharing of code between different connections 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 87/198
ED MCD
Service 2
speech eech 12.2 TRUE 12.2 kb/s
Service 3
CS 64 TRUE kb/s
UL
DL 12.2 40 mE 2% 2000
UL
CS 64 DL
User traffic parameters Bearer throughput (kb/s) Traffic (speech: mErlang ; data: kbits @ BH) Blocking probability Subscribers Number of subs per km2 transmission parameters Eb/N0 (dB) Soft handover use (DCH or DSCH mode) DL SHO Eb/N0 gain Penetration margin (dB) Body loss (dB) Activity factor (%) Maximum mobile Tx power (dBm)
64 6000 kbits 2% 202 4.2 7.1 TRUE 2.5 20 0 100% 24 -
5.7 -
7.8 TRUE 2.5 20 3 60%
21
Table 23 Input Parameter to be given for each circuit service with exemplary values for speech 12.2 kbit/s and CS64kbit/s
5.2.1.1.2 Packet Switched Servic es The parameters characterizing a packet switched service have been defined in detail in chapter 4. recalls those parameters needed as an input for the link budget process for each packet switched service. Uplink: Peak User bit rate Bit rate
Downlink:
QoS and Radio quality
Peak User bit rate

Eb/N0 [dB] for uplink (note: only one multipath environment is treated in the prediction) Eb/N0 [dB] for downlink (note: only one multipath environment is treated in the prediction)
Uplink:
Downlink
GoS
Uplink:
acceptable maximum delay time dULx% and quantile x% (in x% of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dx%.) acceptable maximum delay time dDLx% and quantile x% (in x% of the cases, the delay has to be lower than or equal to dx%.) mean packet size mean number of packets per page
Downlink
Traffic Modelling Parameter
Microscopic
Note that in the link budget approach, these parameters are assumed to be equal for all packet switched services.
Macroscopic Data Volume per busy hour V (in kbit/busy hour) per subscriber Number of subscriber N per sqkm
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 88/198
In addition, the information is needed if DCH or DSCH channels10 are used for the according packet service. There is soft handover in DCH mode and only hard handover in DSCH mode.
Service 2
PS 144 TRUE kb/s 144 PS UL DL
Service 3
PS 384 TRUE kb/s 384 PS UL DL
User traffic parameters Bearer throughput (kb/s) Volume (kbits @ BH) Delay (sec) Quantile for delay Subscribers Number of subs per km2 Transmission parameters Eb/N0 (dB) Soft handover use (DCH or DSCH mode) DL SHO Eb/N0 gain Penetration margin (dB) Body loss (dB) Activity factor (%) Maximum mobile Tx power (dBm)
144 5000 15000 1 90% 200 2.2 4.8 TRUE 2.5 20 0 100% 24 24 1.7 1340
384 4000 0.5 90% 40 4.7 TRUE 2.5 20 0 100% -
Table 24 Input Parameter to be given for each packet switched service with exemplary values for PS144kbit/s and 384 kbit/s
Traffic assumption Packet size Number of packets per page Unit Bytes Value 1000 25
Table 25 Packet switched traffic model parameters (valid for all packet switched services) with typical values
5.2.1.1.3 Additional traffic mode lling inputs As described in chapter 4, as an additional input, the global outage probability has to be given. In this implementation, it is the same for uplink and downlink.
Admission control and outage QoS Global Outage probability Unit % Value 1.00%
Figure 40 Input for Traffic Model
5.2.2 Transmission Paramet ers Table 26 shows the radio input parameters along with typical values. Please note that the shadowing resp. fading margin for the downlink is lower than the margin for the uplink. This is due to the fact that the DL margin is referring to the total transmit power distributed among all mobiles. The variance of this power around the mean value is much lower than for one specific connection, which is quite intuitive to understand: when one mobile is in a deep fade and therefore needs more power, there a good chances that another mobile happens to have at the same moment excellent propagation condition and needs less power, so that the total power is not affected. Alcatel has
10
Please refer to chapter 3 for more information on the channel structure 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 89/198
ED MCD
performed simulations to determine the according shadowing margin for a required coverage probability. Please refer to [TD1] for a more detailed explanations on the fading margins. A specific CDMA parameters is the interference factor f which gives the ratio between intracell interference and extracell interference in uplink. Note that in downlink, this factor is location dependent. The link budget tool AIRMUST therefore also needs the simulation results for this downlink function as an input. Another downlink relevant parameter is the orthogonality factor f which is dependent on the selected multipath environment. This orthogonality factor is a measure for the loss of orthogonality between the code signals in the downlink. An orthogonality factor of 0 means perfect orthogonality, an orthogonality factor of 1 means complete non-orthogonality.
Transmission parameters Thermal noise Chip rate Shadowing standard deviation UL shadowing margin UL Rayleigh fading margin UL f (I_extra / I_intra) DL fading margin on Total Tx Power Orthogonality factor Minimum coupling loss (MCL) Unit dBm/Hz kCh/s dB dB dB dB dB Value -174 3840 8 4.8 1.9 0.7 2 0.4 80
Table 26 Transmission input parameter with typical values
5.2.3 UE specific parameters Table 27 gives the mobile specific input values.
UE characteristics Antenna gain Cable and connector losses Noise factor Unit dB dB dB Value 0 0 8
Table 27 UE specific input parameters with typical values
5.2.4 Node B Specific Param eters Table 28 shows the node B specific and antenna system related parameters. Please note that the use of an MHA (Mast Head Amplifier) reduces the global noise figure of the reception chain. Please refer to chapter 7 for detailed explanation on the MHA use.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 90/198
Maximum Power Cable and Connector Losses NodeB noise factor MHA: MHA use MHA Noise figure MHA gain Global receiver noise factor Antenna gain : tri-sectorised omni bi-sectorised hexa-sectorised
Node B
Unit
dBm dB dB
Value
43 3 4
dB dB dB dB dB dB dB
TRU
2.5 15 2.80 17 11 17 20
Table 28 Node B specific input parameters with typical values
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 91/198
5.2.5 Exemplary Link Budge t Figure 41 presents an exemplary result of the multiservice link budget process including the services speech (12.2 kbit/s), CS 64 kbit/s, PS 144kbit/s and PS 384 kbit/s, in urban area, using trisectorized sites. The link budget is uplink limited (i.e. DL power is reduced to fit the MAPL). The lines containing parameters which are not described in the input parameter section are explained hereafter.
Figure 41 Exemplary Link Budget
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 92/198
The processing gain represents the ratio between chiprate and user bit rate in dB, meaning: Processing Gain= 10log(Rc/Rb). It is given for UL and DL.
This line gives the mean downlink transmit power required in average for one user of the according service. It is the result of the weighting over the power values of all user locations and all handover states.
The downlink transmit power dedicated to the common channels SCH and CPICH. In the current implementation, it is calculated as a percentage (15%) of the total transmitted downlink power in W, then transferred into dBm
For the uplink, this entry gives for each service the total transmit power (in dBm) of a mobile of this service which is located at the edge of the cell. One can detect the limiting service out of this link budget entry, which is the one transmitting at maximum mobile power. For the downlink, this entry gives the total base station power (in dBm) dedicated to traffic channels.
This is a pure downlink entry. It gives the total transmitted base station power in dBm including traffic and common channels.
This line gives the total TX EIRP (meaning TX power minus cable losses plus antenna gain) for uplink (per service for a user located at the edge of the cell) and downlink in dBm.
This line gives the result for the minimum required received level per connection per service (sensitivity), for uplink and downlink in dBm. Please note that this is the reference sensitivity valid for an non-interfered case.
These lines give the minimum required received level for the common channels in downlink in dBm.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 93/198
This downlink entry gives for each service the percentage of users that are in soft handover with the examined nodeB, where this node B provides the best of all SHO links.
This downlink entry gives for each service the percentage of users that are in soft handover with the examined nodeB, but where this node B does not provide the best of all SHO links.
This uplink entry gives the convergence result for the noise rise caused by interference.
This entry gives the uplink cell load xUL and the downlink cell load xDL (for definition of DL cell load, please refer to [MND1]
. The uplink individual load per service is given by 1+ .

Eb
*UL RUL k Rc No k *UL RUL Eb k Rc No k
and is used to calculate the
uplink cell load distribution (see section 5.1.1.1)
This line gives the resulting traffic intensity r for each service within each sector of the cell. (If the surface of the sector is known, the intensity can be derived out of the number of subscribers per sqkm and the service inputs). The traffic intensity is either referring to the Erlang B law (for circuit switched services) or to the Erlang C law on page level (for packet switched services). This parameter is directly related to the macroscopic traffic modelling approach, to understand it better, please refer to chapter 4.
This line gives the resulting GoS. For packet switched services, is gives the resulting percentile delay in seconds, whereas for circuit switched services, it gives the resulting total blocking probability per service.
This line gives the number of carriers required to achieve the shown result.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 94/198
This line gives the resulting maximum allowable pathloss. Please note that it is the limiting pathloss (either DL or UL limited, if UL is the limiting link, it is the pathloss of the limiting service). All other transmit powers have been adapted to fit to this pathloss.
This is the resulting cell range in km.
This is the resulting site area, including the area of all sectors of the site (calculated with the standard hexagonal area relations).
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 95/198
6 CELL PLANNING WIT H PLANNING TOOL

References [SFRAS2] [ILBT4RNP] Alcatel SFRAS Documentation, Part 2, Version 1.4, Overview of telecom functions 3BK 11203 0067 DSZZA, chapter 2.10.6.3 Linkbudget tool of MND department modified by PCS for planning purposes. The tool (EXCEL macro) can be obtained by contacting PCS department.
6.1 Introduction At the time this guideline is written, no 3G planning tool is selected by Alcatel. A workaround using a combined linkbudget/A955 RNP approach is used until a 3G tool is selected. This workaround is presented in this chapter. Further more the UTRA(N) parameters (CMA parameters) which have to be delivered by RNEs to the OMC people for configuring the UMTS network are not specified for the moment. It is clear, that code planning will substitute frequency planning in a CDMA network, thus it is explained in more detail in this chapter. 6.2 Workaround for UMTS cell planning The workaround presented here was already used to verify the a given UMTS network design for two different projects: The UMTS study for tele.ring (Austria) in Vienna and the UMTS study for the Paegas (Poland) network in Ostrava. Both studies are based on a given GSM network design. The goal of the study is to verify if the coverage provided by pre-defined sites and a given traffic mix is sufficient. In case of a greenfield operator the same method can be applied by defining new sites instead of reusing given GSM sites. 6.3 Description of the work around using the example of Ostrava In this report the process of validating a given UMTS network design for the Paegas network in Ostrava is shown. It is proofed, that the cells are able to handle the expected traffic. 6.3.1 Introduction and Proce ss Description The scope of the UMTS Radio network planning task for Paegas in Ostrava was to verify a given network structure. Usual radio network planning consists in defining sites, where base stations have to be installed for getting a radio network fulfilling the given radio requirements. In this case, existing GSM network sites have to be reused for building up the new UMTS network. Therefore the planning task consists no longer in searching new sites, but in verifying a given network for its ability to meet given quality of service requirements.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 96/198
The applied network planning methodology mainly consists of 4 steps: 1. Collecting or defining the required input data 2. Use the Alcatel RNP tool A955 to calculate power distribution and strongest server plots 3. Use the ILBT4RNP tool to calculate the allowed size of a cell depending on the given traffic mix. 4. Compare the achieved cells sizes of the two tools and take the more limiting one. The verification process is very fast and can be applied for other networks too. 6.3.2 Input Data 6.3.2.1 Databases For the radio network planning part using A955 the morpho structure and the DEM (topo) database are required. They are used to get a reliable received power prediction. As existing GSM sites had to be reused, the site, sector and antenna files currently used in Ostrava have been used to be sure to have no inconsistencies between the UMTS and the GSM site locations. Some of the GSM sites have been selected to be reused for the UMTS network according to market requirements and site restrictions. To verify if it is possible to handle the expected UMTS traffic with the selected cells was exactly the aim of this planning task. The selected GSM sites are displayed on the topography map in Picture 1.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 97/198
Picture 1:
Selected sites for the Paegas UMTS network proposal Ostrava
6.3.2.2 Traffic The following traffic mix in table 2 is given for business users and consumer users. For Circuit switched services the duration of the call and activity factors are important, for Packet switched services the transmitted kbit per main busy hour (mbh) are of interest. The given traffic mix is only valid for the start up phase of the UMTS network! The subscriber density in subs/km is given per service with the assumption of equality in all regions within Ostrava.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 98/198
Table 29:
Traffic mix and Subscriber density table used for the Ostrava UMTS planning
6.3.3 A955 planning step The A955 radio network planning tool is in this planning context used for calculating the strongest server areas. For each cell the size of the area is calculated where the cell has the strongest received power and thus is quite probable the serving cell. One possible output of the tool is shown in the picture below:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 99/198
Picture 2:
Calculating the service areas of the UMTS cells with A955
The strongest server calculation is based on the fieldstrength prediction of each cell. 6.3.4 ILBT4RNP planning ste ps After calculating the cell size with A955 independent from the given traffic, it has to be checked if these cells can handle the traffic generated in their cell area. Therefore the tool [ILBT4RNP] is used, which allows to calculate the maximum allowed cell range (and thus cell area) assuming a certain traffic mix and subscriber densities. The propagation model used inside ILBT4RNP is of course adapted to the one used in A955. As the ILBT4RNP does not take into account different morpho classes within one calculation run, a default morpho class (lower urban) is selected. If the cell size calculated by ILBT4RNP is to small, the average morpho class of this cell is investigated more deeply and corrected if necessary. Afterwards, the cell range is recalculated and the cell size comparison is done again.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 100/19 8
6.3.4.1 Propagation model For information, the path loss prediction algorithm used by ILBT4RNP (simplified Hata Okumura) is given hereafter:
L= A + B*log(d/km)
With:
A B d f hBS = 46.3 + 33.9*log(f/MHz) 13.82*log(hBS) - KClutter = 44.9 6.55*log(hBS) distance in km frequency in MHz hight of BTS antenna
With the assumptions of hBS = 30m and f=2000MHz we get:

A [dB] = 137.79 KClutter B [dB] = 35.22
The morpho correction factor KClutter is selected according to the average morpho class within the cell if necessary (in the first run, the default morpho class lower urban is used). 6.3.4.2 Input parameters A summary of all input parameters selected for the Paegas project is given in Picture 3. The selected Eb/N0 targets are derived from simulations of the Technical Department.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 101/19 8
Picture 3:
Summary of all input parameters for the link budget calculation with ILBT4RNP
6.3.4.3 ILBT4RNP output ILBT4RNP is generating numerous output values, but in this context only the following ones have been used (see also ):

Maximum allowed cell range UL cell load DL Transmit Power of the Node B (total for all connections)
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 102/19 8
After the calculation ILBT4RNP provides in addition information about the cell range limiting parameter. In this project it has always been the UL transmit power! 6.3.5 Comparison of the inte rmediate results After calculating the cell sizes with A955 and ILBT4RNP, the more limiting cell range has to be taken. Three scenarios have been distinguished: 1. A955 cell size < ILBT4RNP cell size 2. A955 cell size = ILBT4RNP cell size 3. A955 cell size > ILBT4RNP cell size More explanations for each case are given below: 1. In the first case, nothing has to be done, as the traffic generated within the cell can be handled according to ILBT4RNP. 2. There is a tolerance factor of 10% applied for comparing the two calculated cell areas. If the difference is below this tolerance, no action is performed to adapt them, because they are equal taking the accuracy of the results into account. 3. If the cell size calculated by A955 is bigger than the one calculated by ILBT4RNP, the users at the cell border will not be able to be connected to the network because of the weak UL transmit power. Therefore the size of these cells is adapted according the max. allowed cell range calculated by ILBT4RNP. After performing the necessary changes within the network, the new cell sizes are recalculated (because changing the size of one cell has of course influence on the surrounding cells also). The new cell sizes are again compared to the allowed ones and again modified if necessary. In the Ostrava UMTS network project only two iterations have been necessary to achieve cells sizes below the allowed threshold given by ILBT4RNP. 8 cells still are bigger than allowed by the traffic mix (e.g. Nakladni 3 -> see Table 30). This does not mean, that there will be coverage holes after installing the UMTS network, but during main busy hour not all services (according the given traffic mix) are available at the same time. An extract of the used comparison table is shown in Table 30:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 103/19 8
Table 30: Part of the table used for the comparison of the different results
In Table 30 it can be seen, that in most cases the allowed cell range is 0.91 km. This is due to the fact, that we use the default morpho class lower urban if there is no need for modification. For modified morpho values other cell ranges appear. E.g. Nakladni 3 has an average morpho correction factor of 13 (instead of 5), thus the cell range is 1.53 km (instead of 0.91 km). Sites which are not part of the city area itself (rural sites) have been excluded from the investigation by setting a rural site flag. Of course sites located at the border of the network have a much bigger strongest server area than sites in the middle of the network. Assuming a constant traffic mix over the whole area is then leading to an overload of this rural sites. The coverage area (strongest server area) of these cells has been modified by restricting the maximum allowed cell range to the one given by ILBT4RNP. Thus, the cell areas shown in the strongest server plot (Picture 2), are reflecting the real service areas which can be expected after installing the network. 6.3.6 Results & Conclusion o f the workaround The proposed network design for the Paegas UMTS network is in most cases able to handle the expected traffic. In total nine cells will not be able to handle all the traffic during main busy hour. This gap can be filled by optimization/densification works. 6.4 Code planning instead of frequency planning In GSM the different communications are separated by time and frequency. This is no longer the case for a CDMA based system like UMTS. Each communication is using the same frequency ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 104/19 8
bandwidth if only one 5MHz frequency band is used in the network. The communications are separated by scrambling codes and channelization codes. The channelization codes are managed by the UTRAN itself and thus dont have to be planned by the RNE. Scrambling codes are allocated in the UL again by the UTRAN, but in DL they have to be assigned by the RNE. In total there are 8192 DL scrambling codes available for normal operation. For compressed mode operation (during inter frequency measurements and handovers) additionally 16384 scrambling codes can be used by the system. The 8192 DL scrambling codes for normal operation are subdivided into primary scrambling codes (512) and corresponding secondary scrambling codes (7680). To each primary scrambling 15 secondary ones are associated. Together they are constituting a scrambling code group of 16 codes [SFRAS2]. The 512 primary scrambling codes are additionally subdivided into 64 subgroups for speeding up the call setup process. As the allocation of secondary scrambling codes is done by the URTRAN, the RNE only has to plan the primary scrambling code which is always used for CPICH and PCCPCH. In UMTS the RNE must allocate for each cell one, and only one (primary) scrambling code. As there are 512 primary scrambling codes available, it is no problem to assign to cells primary scrambling codes which are not used by cells in the vicinity of the cell (which are receivable). The rule to be applied when assigning primary scrambling codes is: Try to maximize the distance between cells using the same primary scrambling code. When using a planning tool, this function will for sure be implemented.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 105/19 8
7 ANTENNA ENGINEER ING

REFERENCED DOCUMENTS [AntRules]
Antenna Engineering Rules, U.Birkel
3DF 00995 0000 PGZZA [SiteShare] Site Sharing GSM/UMTS RF Aspects, F. Falke, A. Grtner and K. Daniel; 3DC 21019 0005 TQZZA [CoLoc] [Perf_TD] [Perf_SP] [ANXU]
Co-Location of GSM1800 and UMTS/FDD Sites, A. Grtner
Deliverable for Bouygues UMTS Project, Co-location workgroup

UTRA/FDD PERFORMANCE FOR SPEECH SERVICE WITH TRANSMIT DIVERSITY,
P. Agin, TD/SYT draft document

UTRA/FDD PERFORMANCE FOR SPEECH SERVICE
P. Agin, TD/SYT/pag/640.99
3G UMTS ANTENNA NETWORK WITH INTEGRATED DIPLEXER ANXU, R. Krukenberg
3BK11240 0002 DSZZA 7.1 Introduction This document is a guideline on UMTS antenna engineering. It constitutes a complement for document [AntRules], treating all UMTS specific antenna engineering aspects by maintaining the validity of the general (non-GSM specific) antenna engineering rules described in [AntRules]. The knowledge of [AntRules] is therefore a mandatory precondition to use this document. 7.2 Antenna Tilt Since UMTS is an interference limited system, a reduction of the interference brings directly benefits concerning coverage and capacity. In order to reduce the downlink intercell interference, the application of antenna downtilts constitutes a good solution. In [AntRules], the concept is described in detail. 7.3 Diversity Aspects
7.3.1 RX Diversity As described in [AntRules], one can achieve a RX diversity gain through two uncorrelated reception branches. In a UMTS system, this gain is manifested by a reduction of the required received uplink Eb/No. This is shown exemplarily in Table 31 by simulation results for an 8 kb/s voice channel. The simulation assumption was that the two RX signals were completely uncorrelated.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 106/19 8
Environment
Speed (km/h) 3 6 10
Uplink
1 antenna 2 antennas Div. Gain
7.7 7.9 8.0 8.1 8.3 8.9 9.5 11.1 7.2 7.7 7.8 8.2 8.6 9.1
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 6.3 7.0 8.5 4.2 4.8 4.7 4.8 5.0 5.8
2.6 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.6 2.5 2.6 3.0 2.9 3.1 3.4 3.6 3.3
Vehicular A
25 50 120 200 350 3 6
Pedestrian A 10 25 50 120
Table 31: Rx Eb/N0 required for a BER of 10-3 in speech 8 kbps and corresponding diversity gain For an AWGN (additive white gaussian noise) channel, i.e. a channel with a constant power and additive white gaussian noise, the antenna diversity gain is 3 dB. Indeed the noise of the two reception antennas being uncorrelated, a maximum ratio combining of the signals of the two antennas enables to decrease the overall noise variance of 3 dB. For multipath channels like Pedestrian A and Vehicular A, the antenna diversity gain may be even larger. Indeed, since the Rayleigh fadings of the two antennas are uncorrelated, when the received power is small for one of the antenna, there is a good probability that it is larger for the other antenna. Thus, antenna diversity enables to decrease the received power variations, which has a positive impact on performance. Thus, the larger the received signal power variations (or more generally the SIR variations when the interference is not constant) without antenna diversity, the larger the antenna diversity gain. For low speeds, the power control performs efficiently. Thus, the channel power variations are pretty small and the channel is close to an AWGN channel. Therefore, the antenna diversity gain is close to 3 dB. It can be a little lower than 3 dB, because of the extra noise due to interchip interference that is not AWGN. This effect is more visible in Vehicular A where the interchip interference is significant. An additional aspect which decreases the gain in reality is the fact that the decorrelation between the antennas is not ideal in most of the cases. For medium to large speeds, the power control does not work properly anymore. Therefore, the channel variations are larger and the antenna diversity gain is (slightly) larger. This effect is more visible in Pedestrian A where channel variations are large. Finally, the antenna diversity gain is larger in Pedestrian A than in Vehicular A since the channel power variations are larger and the interchip interference is lower in Pedestrian A.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 107/19 8
The RX diversity gain therefore depends on the service, on the multipath profile and on the velocity. TD/SYT provides simulation results for different services. [Perf_TD], [Perf_SP] give the results for speech. In order to benefit, in a real system from gains which are in the same order of magnitude as given in the simulations, one has to assure the decorrelation of the two reception branches by space diversity or polarization diversity (see [AntRules]). For space diversity, this decorrelation can be achieved by applying the same separation rules as given in [AntRules]: The distance where the two antennas can be assumed to be decorrelated is

for horizontal separation: dH=20l, this means dH=3m for UMTS/FDD for vertical separation dV =15l, this means dV =2.25m for UMTS/FDD
According to [AntRules], a second condition has to be fulfilled: d>antenna height/10, where d is the distance between the antennas As in GSM, cross polarized antennas should be used in urban and suburban areas, whereas two separated vertical polarized antennas should be used in rural areas for space diversity. Outlook: More than two antennas could be used in the future, allowing an additional gain of approximately 3 dB. The potential gain of receive antenna diversity with 2, 3 or 4 perfectly uncorrelated antennas is shown in Figure 42 for exemplarily for Pedestrian A environment and a speed of 3km/h. The indicated BER is measured at the output of the channel decoder.
Speech 8 kbps, Pedestrian A, 3 km/h, Uplink 1 1 rx antenna 2 rx antennas 3 rx antennas 4 rx antennas
0.1
0.01 BER
0.001
0.0001
1e-005
1e-006 -2 0 2 4 Rx Eb/N0 6 8 10
Figure 42: Receive antenna gain for Speech 8 kbps service in Pedestrian A, 3 km/h
7.3.2 TX STTD Diversity Gain An introduction to the UMTS transmit diversity techniques can be found in chapter 2. As TSTD is only applied for the SCH channel and closed loop diversity is not included in the MBS V1, in this chapter only the expected gain due to STTD is given. The diversity gain provided by STTD is manifested by a reduction of the required received downlink Eb/N0. The following table shows the effect exemplarily for a 8kb/s voice channel and the ETSI
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 108/19 8
defined multipath environments Vehicular A and Pedestrian A (see [Perf_TD]). TD/SYT link level simulations will provide values also for other services soon. Environment Speed (km/h)
3 6 10
Vehicular A
Downlink
Without Tx STTD diversity
6.8 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.4 7.6 8.4 10.4 6.5 7.1 7.6 8 8.3 8.5 6.6 6.9 7.0 6.9 7.1 7.5 8.2 10.0 6.3 6.6 6.9 7.0 7.3 7.7
25 50 120 200 350 3 6
Pedestrian A
10 25 50 120
Table 32: Received Eb/N0 required for a BER of 10-3 in speech 8 kbps Please note that using TX diversity has an additional advantage: Instead of using one TX branch with maximal power of 25W (43dBm), we can now use two TX branches with 25W (43dBm) each, which means that we have a gain of 3dB in the power budget. However, this is not a diversity gain since we are merely doubling the TX power. Now, what does the TX diversity technique mean for antenna engineering? In order to benefit from the transmit diversity gain, we need two TX antennas per carrier which can be looked at as being uncorrelated. This is given by two vertical polarised antennas which are separated by a certain distance (space diversity). The according separation rules can be found in chapter 7.3.1 and in [AntRules]. Also the signals coming from the two branches of a cross polarised antenna can be looked at as being decorrelated (polarisation diversity). Therefore for operation with duplexer, we can use each RX diversity antenna also for transmission with TX diversity. 7.4 ANXU (Antenna Netwo rk for UMTS) The antenna network for UMTS (ANXU) will be integrated in the UMTS node B. It connects up to 2 transmitters to 2 antennas and distributes received signals to the receivers. The ANXU is splitted in two identical parts A and B.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 109/19 8
The diplexer filters are designed to decouple the transmit and receive bands in order to use one antenna for the received and transmitted signals. The two receiving branches are containing low noise amplifiers (LNA) with software adjustable gain, remote DC feeds and power splitters for the connection of up to three receivers, providing signals for all diversity pathes. The possibility of supplying an external MHA (Mast Head Amplifier Unit) for the receive path is integrated. Figure 43 gives a schematic representation of the ANXU antenna network.
Antenna A Antenna B
Filterblock A
Filterblock B
Diplexer
Diplexer
LNA A
LNA B
3 way RX Splitter A
3 way RX Splitter B
TX_A_in
RXA/B1
RXA/B2
RXA/B3
TX_B_in
Figure 43 Schematic Representation of ANXU
7.4.1 Single Carrier Configur ation with Transmit Diversity If the downlink diversity is activated, two TX branches are needed for one carrier11. Therefore, we need one ANXU per carrier. Figure 44 shows schematically the according configuration. All 6 RX output ports provide RX diversity information for carrier f1, which are combined in the RAKE receiver.
11
Keep in mind that we have at maximum 3 carriers for a UMTS/FDD sector (2 for some operators, e.g. in Germany) 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 110/19 8
ED MCD
ANTA
2x25W
ANTB
f1
STTD Encoder
ANXU
Figure 44:Configuration for Single Carrier Application with Downlink Diversity
7.4.2 Dual Single Carrier Co nfiguration In the case that no downlink diversity is desired, one can use the ANXU for 2 carriers (f1 and f2). Figure 45 shows the according configuration.
ANTA
2x25W
ANTB
f1 ANXU f2
Figure 45 Configuration for Application for 2 carriers without Downlink Diversity
7.5 MHA (Mast Head Amp lifier) Low-noise antenna pre-amplifiers installed near the antennas are sometimes used in cellular systems. They are referred to as "Tower Mounted Amplifiers" (TMA) or "Mast Head Amplifier" (MHA). A masthead amplifier can be used at a UMTS base station (node B) to improve the effective receiver system noise figure when a long length of feeder cable is used, which will be explained in detail below. The reduction in the receiver system noise figure is translated into an improvement in the uplink power budget. This can be interpreted as compensating the losses of the feeder and connectors between the antenna and the input of the base station.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 111/19 8
Antenna
Duplexer MHA Tx Duplexer Feeder Rx
Tx / Rx
BTS / Node B
Figure 46: Schematic representation of MHA application
For RX or RX/TX antenna diversity operation, the configuration has to be doubled (two MHAs, i.e. one for each antenna) Within the MHA, the shown diplexers separate and recombine the signals on the Rx and Tx paths. They also provide sufficient out-of-band filtering and isolation between the two paths. Only the Rx signals get amplified, thus, improving the quality of the uplink branch. In contrast, the MHA causes an additional attenuation of ca. 1 dB on the Tx path. In case MHAs are present in the system, they have to be considered for the design of the antenna system. For the downlink, the additional loss of 1dB has to be taken into account. For the uplink, unfortunately, the impact cannot be treated by adding a simple MHA gain within the power budget. Since the MHA reduces the total noise figure of the reception chain, one has to apply the total noise figure of the reception chain in the calculations. The reception chain contains as elements the MHA, node B, cables and connectors, and perhaps diplexers or filters. The calculations can be done by the Friess Formula:
ntot = n MHA +
ncable - 1 n BS - 1 n DX - 1 + + g MHA g MHA g cable g MHA g cable g DX
Equation 6: Friess Formula with MHA
with nelement = 10
NFelement 10
and g element = 10
Gelement 10
where NFelement is the noise figures in dB and Gelement is the gain in dB of the corresponding element (note that a loss is a negative gain!). The index element can be MHA, cable (denotes cables and connectors), DX (denotes diplexer or filter) or BS (denotes node B). If there are no diplexers or filters in the chain, nDX and gDX are set to 1. In case we have no MHA, the Friess Formula becomes: ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 112/19 8
ntot = ncable +
n BS - 1 n DX - 1 + g cable g cable g DX
Equation 7 Friess Formula without MHA
Example: Element MHA Noise Figure (NF) 2dB 2dB 4dB Gain 12dB -2dB
Cable 25m Node B (incl. ANXU)
No diplexers or filters are used in the example. Applying the Friess Formula, we get: Noise Figure of MHA & cable & nodeB 2.5dB 7.6 GSM and UMTS/FDD C o-location Providers operating already a GSM system cannot afford to simply add new sites for the UMTS system. The existing GSM sites have to be re-used. Even new operators might be confronted with sites already equipped with base stations of another operator. However, using the same site for both systems is far from being trivial from the RF point of view. The most challenging aspect of UMTS Antenna Engineering is therefore to find antenna system solutions to make the co-location of UMTS Node Bs with existing GSM BTSs possible, for both GSM 900 and GSM 1800. 7.6.1 RF Requirements 7.6.1.1 Interference Mechanis m Co-location of systems may cause interference resulting in performance degradation. In order to minimize this performance degradation to an acceptable defined level, decoupling requirements between the systems have to be met. The most important interference mechanisms are:
Noise Figure of cable & node B 6dB
Transmitter noise/ spurious emissions The transmitter noise floor or transmitter spurious of system "A" within the receive band of system "B" causes interference of system "Bs" receiver and vice versa. This could be avoided by increasing the stop band attenuation of system "As" antenna network in the transmit path for the receive band of system "B", or by increasing decoupling between the two systems, either the air decoupling or the decoupling provided by the diplexer.
Receiver blocking Transmit signals of system "A" are blocking the receiver of system "B" and vice versa. Although the transmit signals of system A are received by B out-of-band (meaning not within Bs receive band), they can lead to a desensitization if they are too strong. This
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 113/19 8
could be avoided by increasing the stopband (out-of-band) attenuation of system "Bs" antenna network in the receive path for transmit frequencies of system "A", or by increasing the decoupling between the two systems (air or diplexer decoupling).
Intermodulation products Intermodulation products are interfering the receivers of one or both systems. Significant intermodulation products are generated in nonlinear devices (especially mixers and amplifiers but also connectors), if two ore more strong signals are applied. In our case the strong signals could be different transmit carriers either from system "A" or from system "B" or a combination of system "As" and "Bs" transmit carriers. For the consideration within this document, it is assumed that the TREs performance to avoid intermodulation is already fixed. Not considered are interference mechanisms within one system, because they occur also without co-location.
7.6.1.2 Decoupling requireme nts For the co-located systems, an antenna decoupling resp. diplexer decoupling of at least 30dB can be assumed, no matter if the decoupling is provided by single band antennas, dual band antennas or diplexers. According to measurements [CoLoc], even side-by-side installations of single band antennas provide this value. Therefore, only decoupling requirements exceeding 30dB are judged as critical in the following and require adapted solutions. In the decoupling tables below, the value of 30dB is therefore indicated even if a lower decoupling value would already be sufficient. All decoupling values are referring to an isolation between the antenna connectors. For calculation of the required decoupling, different cases are distinguished which look at the Alcatel equipment performance (EVOLIUM GSM and EVOLIUM UMTS) and the equipment performance according to GSM 05.05 and 3G TS 25.104 recommendation.
Antenna system
Antenna connectors
ANC
TX/ RX TX/ RX
ANC
TRE
TRE
Feeder
GSM BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 47: Decoupling Reference Point
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 114/19 8
7.6.1.2.1 Decoupling Requireme nts due to Spurious Emissions
7.6.1.2.1.1 Co-located GSM1800 a nd UMTS sites

The spurious emissions resp. the transmitter noise floor are most critical in case of co-located GSM 1800 UMTS sites. The limiting factor for decoupling requirements results from the GSM 1800 transmitter noise floor, the spurious emissions respectively, of the GSM 1800 BTS within the UMTS receive band. There are historical reasons for that: At the time GSM 1800 was specified, no one expected an UMTS system working in the adjacent band. Therefore, the filter requirements for the GSM 1800 BTS are rather inadequate. According to the ETSI recommendation GSM 05.05, spurious emissions within a bandwidth of 3 MHz in the UMTS band have to be below 30 dBm at the antenna connector. Note: Between GSM systems 98 dBm is specified. After mapping this requirement on 3.84 MHz, which is the effective carrier bandwidth of UMTS, the maximum interference may reach -29 dBm. This is much higher than the interference level acceptable by the UMTS Node B. For calculation of the required decoupling, two cases are distinguished. One includes the Alcatel EVOLIUM GSM 1800 equipment performance, the other is based on the GSM 05.05 recommendation.
Antenna system
Spurious emissions ETSI: < -29 dBm Alcatel : < -67 dBm
Antenna connectors
Limiting interference level: < - 114 dBm
ANC:
UMTS band attenuation: 40 dB
TX/ RX
Antenna Connection Network

TX/ RX
TRE-level:
TX spurious emissions: < -27 dBm
Transceiver-level
Feeder
EVOLIUMTM BTS 1800
UMTS Node B
ANC: TRE: Transceiver Equipment
Antenna
Network
Combiner
Figure 48: Conditions for noise / spurious emission GSM 1800 UMTS
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 115/19 8
To determine the decoupling requirements, an acceptable degradation of the Node B sensitivity of 0.4dB (caused by the spurious emissions) has been assumed12. Equipment type ETSI specifications (GSM 05.05) Alcatel EVOLIUM GSM 1800 BTS TX, spurious emissions: - 27 dBm ANC, attenuation in UMTS band: 40 dB - 27 dBm 40 dB = - 67 dBm Spurious - 29 dBm emissions (at BTS antenna connector) Limiting interference level
Noise at UMTS receiver without GSM 1800 impact: Thermal noise (-108 dBm) plus receiver noise figure (4 dB), i.e. 104 dBm (Pnoise [dBm] = -174 dBm + System Noise Figure [dB] + 10 log (BW [Hz]) Degradation of sensitivity by 0.4 dB acceptable (level 10 dB below noise floor) -104 dBm 10 dB = -114 dBm
Required decoupling
- 29 dBm decoupling = -114 dBm Decoupling = 85 dB
-67 dBm decoupling = -114 dBm Decoupling = 47 dB
Table 33: Decoupling calculation for GSM1800 transmitter noise/ spurious emissions within UMTS receive band.
The calculation shows that a standard antenna decoupling of 30 dB is not sufficient for co-located GSM 1800 and UMTS systems. Additional measures have to be performed, presented later in this document. The spurious emissions of the UMTS node B within the GSM1800 are not critical. Therefore, a decoupling of 30dB from the UMTS antenna connector towards the GSM1800 antenna connector is sufficient. The resulting decoupling requirements are shown in Table 34. Required decoupling GSM 1800 GSM 1800 UMTS from ... to (05.05) (Alcatel) 25.104) GSM 1800 (05.05) GSM (Alcatel) 1800 30dB 30dB 30dB 30dB 85dB 47dB (TS UMTS (Alcatel) 85dB 47dB
UMTS (TS 25.104) UMTS (Alcatel)
Table 34 Decoupling requirements due to spurious emissions for GSM1800 UMTS co-location
Therefore, the 2 rightmost columns represent the limiting decoupling requirements.
7.6.1.2.1.2 Co-located GSM900 an d UMTS sites
12
Rule of thumb:
0.1/0.2/0.4/1.0 dB degradation, if spurious level is 16/13/10/6 dB below noise floor
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 116/19 8
For the combination GSM 900 UMTS, 30 dB antenna decoupling is enough for transmitter noise/ spurious emission conditions. The resulting decoupling requirements are shown in Table 35. Required decoupling GSM (05.05) from to GSM 900 (05.05) GSM 900 (Alcatel) UMTS (TS 25.104) 30dB UMTS (Alcatel) 30dB 30dB 30dB 900 GSM (Alcatel) 900 UMTS 25.104) 30 dB(1) 30dB (TS UMTS (Alcatel) 30dB(1) 30dB
Table 35 Decoupling requirements due to spurious emissions for GSM 900 UMTS co-location
Note: The ANC of the EVOLIUM GSM 900 BTS provides with 65 dB attenuation in the 2 GHz band sufficient
decoupling for co-located UMTS sites. It can be assumed, that also other standard ETSI equipment with their integrated antenna network complies with the decoupling demand, but this has to be checked.
7.6.1.3 Receiver blocking For this interference mechanism, the receiver out-of-band blocking characteristic measured at the antenna connector of the BTS/ Node B is very important. The minimum system decoupling requirements are indicated in the next table:
Antenna
Antenna
TX power
Decoupling
RX blocking
TX power
BTS or Node B
BTS or Node B
Figure 49: Receiver blocking, principle
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 117/19 8
GSM 900 (RX)

Specification GSM according to: 05.05 GSM 05.05 GSM 900 (TX) Alcatel GSM 05.05 GSM 1800 (TX) Alcatel Alcatel
GSM 1800 (RX)

GSM 05.05 Alcatel
UMTS (RX)
3G TS Alcatel 25.104
46 dB 46 dB 39 dB 39 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 43 dB 43 dB
30 dB 30 dB
61 dB 61 dB 62 dB 62 dB
30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB
UMTS (TX)
3G 25.104 Alcatel
TS 35 dB
30 dB 30 dB
35 dB
It is assumed, that the decoupling provided by the antenna/diplexer system is at least 30 dB. In fact, using Alcatel EVOLIUM equipment requires for certain combinations even less isolation than stated here.
Table 36: Decoupling requirements
The significant improvement of the Alcatel EVOLIUM equipment results from the integrated antenna network filters. Link budget examples in the following sub-chapters give an overview about the relation between antenna decoupling and the blocking level. 7.6.1.3.1 Receiver blocking betw een GSM 1800 and UMTS
Link budget GSM 1800 TX output power (high power) Assumed antenna decoupling Assumed feeder and connector loss UMTS received power (@ 1800 MHz) Specification UMTS blocking limit Blocking limit fulfilled
Value 46.7 dBm - 30 dB 0 dB 16.7 dBm ETSI -15 dBm No Alcatel 20 dBm 2 Yes
Table 37: Link budget for blocking evaluation, GSM 1800 blocks receiver of UMTS
Value is based on ETSI blocking limits in addition with the integrated antenna network filters of the EVOLIUM equipment. 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 118/19 8
ED MCD
Link budget UMTS Node B TX output power Assumed antenna decoupling Assumed feeder and connector loss GSM 1800 received power (@ 2000 MHz) Specification GSM 1800 blocking limit Blocking limit fulfilled
Value 43.0 dBm - 30 dB 0 dB 13.0 dBm ETSI 0 dBm No Alcatel 25 dBm 2 Yes
Table 38: Link budget for blocking evaluation, UMTS blocks receiver of GSM1800
7.6.1.3.2 Receiver blocking betw een GSM 900 and UMTS Link budget GSM 900 TX output power Assumed antenna decoupling Assumed feeder and connector loss UMTS received power (@ 900 MHz) Specification UMTS blocking limit Blocking limit fulfilled Value 46.0 dBm - 30 dB 0 dB 16.0 dBm ETSI -15 dBm Yes Alcatel 25 dBm Yes
Table 39: Link budget for blocking evaluation, GSM 900 blocks receiver of UMTS
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 119/19 8
Link budget UMTS Node B TX output power Assumed antenna decoupling Assumed feeder and connector loss GSM 900 received power (@ 2000 MHz) Specification GSM 900 blocking Blocking limit fulfilled
Value 43.0 dBm - 30 dB 0 dB 13.0 dBm ETSI 8 dBm Yes Alcatel 35dBm Yes
Table 40: Link budget for blocking evaluation, UMTS blocks receiver of GSM900
7.6.1.3.3 Receiver blocking conc lusion Receiver blocking is no problem for co-located Alcatel equipment assuming an antenna decoupling of 30 dB (and even less). Co-location with equipment from other suppliers needs to be checked case-by-case. 7.6.1.4 Intermodulation 7.6.1.4.1 The basics Intermodulation, also called non-linear distortion, is generated in non-linear devices. The transfer characteristic of such devices, e.g. the V-I characteristic of a semiconductor diode or the output versus input power characteristic of an amplifier, is non-linear. At high power levels, even connectors exhibit non-linear effects. Figure 50 shows an amplifiers transfer curve as an example. At low input levels, the output signal is almost a linear function of the input signal. With increasing input level, the output level will be less than expected and eventually be limited to the saturated output power of the amplifier e.g. due to power supply constraints.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 120/19 8
50
45 Output power in dBm
40
35
30
25 -20
-15
-10
-5 0 Input power in dBm
10
15
Figure 50: Non-linear transfer characteristic of a power amplifier
Such a transfer curve could be approximated by a power series:

Vout(t) = C1 Vin(t) + C2 Vin(t)2 + C3 Vin(t)3 + C4 Vin(t)4 + ...
The output signal of a non-linear device will not have the same shape as the input signal. Its frequency spectrum will have more components than the input signal. The new frequency components are either harmonics of the input frequencies or a combination of the input components (mixing). These new frequencies are called intermodulation products. If the input signal is made up of two sinewave signals with frequencies f1 and f2, the output signal will contain frequency components at with m, n = 0, +1, +2, +3, ... fIM = m f1 + n f2
The sum of (the unsigned) n and m is called the order of the intermodulation product, e.g. fIM = 2 f1 - 1 f2 is called a third-order intermodulation product (IM3). Third-order intermodulation products arise from the third degree and higher odd degree power series term of the transfer curve. Figure 51 shows a output spectrum with intermodulation products up to third order. The frequencies f1 and f2 are the two tone excitations at the input of the device.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 121/19 8
Figure 51: Two tone output spectrum with intermodulation products up to third order
The level of a specific intermodulation component depends on the coefficients of the power series contributing to this component, and the input power level applied to the non-linear device. Typically, high-order intermodulation products have lower levels than low-order intermodulation products. Because of the higher order power series terms from which the intermodulation products will be generated, the levels of the intermodulation products will rise more than linear with the input signal level, e.g. third-order terms will rise by 3 dB if the input signal is raised by 1 dB. This is the reason why intermodulation products are not a problem at low input power levels for a given device, but at high input levels they might. The ratio of wanted signal to intermodulation product decreases with increasing input signal level. A typical scenario for co-located base stations is shown in Figure 52 below:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 122/19 8
Antennas
Dual-band antenna
Air decoupling
Diplexer
Feeder Feeder
Diplexer
Diplexer TX/ RX TX/ RX TX/ RX TX/ RX
ANC
TRE TRE
ANXU
TRE TRE
ANC
TRE TRE
ANXU
TRE TRE
GSM BTS
UMTS Node B
GSM BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 52: Air decoupling (left side) and diplexer decoupling (right side) for co-located sites
Either air decoupling or diplexer decoupling is used to fulfil the decoupling requirements at the BTS resp. Node B connectors. In any case, the antennas are used for reception as well as for transmission, the TX/RX duplexer function is integrated within the antenna network combiner (ANC) module. It is assumed, that each system itself (not co-located) fulfils the requirements on intermodulation performance in order not to degrade its own receivers. Only intermodulation mechanisms due to the interaction of both systems are considered. The reference point for intermodulation products inside a used receive channel is the BTS antenna connector. As long as the interfering signal level is well below the systems noise floor, almost no receiver degradation will occur. As a rule of thumb the following degradation of the reference sensitivity will occur: 0.1 dB degradation, if intermodulation level is 16 dB below noise floor

0.2 dB degradation, if intermodulation level is 13 dB below noise floor 0.4 dB degradation, if intermodulation level is 10 dB below noise floor 1.0 dB degradation, if intermodulation level is 6 dB below noise floor
The noise floor of the system is determined by Pnoise [dBm] = -174 dBm + System Noise Figure [dB] + 10 log (Receive Channel Bandwidth [Hz])
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 123/19 8
For a typical receiver with a noise figure of 4 dB the noise floor is 117.0 dBm for a GSM system 104.2 dBm for a UMTS system. Intermodulation problems due to co-location might rise, if transmit carriers from the co-located system "A" generate intermodulation products falling into a used receive channel of system "B" or vice versa. Also a combination of transmit frequencies of both systems might fall into a used receive channel of either system "B" or system "A." 7.6.1.4.2 Lowest order intermod ulation products which might fall inside a used receive channel Only co-located systems of different types are taken into account in this chapter. In the table below, the lowest order intermodulation products, which might fall inside a used RX channel, are listed. Intermodulation between the own systems transmit frequencies and the colocated systems transmit frequencies as well as intermodulation between the co-located systems transmit frequencies which could impact the own system have been taken into account. Co-location GSM 1800 UMTS Intermodulation products 3rd order: GSM 1800 TX within UMTS RX band
(e.g. 2 x 1879.8 MHz 1 x 1820 MHz = 1939.6 MHz)
10th order: GSM 1800 and UMTS TX within GSM 1800 RX band
(e.g. 5 x 2153 MHz 5 x 1810 MHz = 1715 MHz)
12th order: GSM 1800 and UMTS TX within UMTS RX band

(e.g. 6 x 2167.4 MHz 6 x 1837.8 MHz = 1977.6 MHz)
GSM 900 UMTS
4 order: GSM 900 TX within UMTS RX

(e.g. 3 x 959.8 MHz 1 x 935.2 = 1944.2 MHz)
th
9th order: GSM 900 and UMTS TX within GSM 900 band
(e.g. 3 x 2167.6 MHz 6 x 935.4 MHz = 890.4 MHz)
12th order: GSM 900 and UMTS TX within UMTS RX band

(e.g. 9 x 930 MHz 3 x 2140 MHz = 1950 MHz) Table 41: Intermodulation products
The impact of Intermodulation products of order 6 and higher can be neglected.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 124/19 8
7.6.1.4.3 Conclusion of Intermod ulation interference The intermodulation interference is particularly important for co-located GSM 1800 and UMTS systems. Especially the third-order intermodulation products (IM3) of GSM 1800 transmitters may cause interference within the UMTS receive band. This means that IM3 products may occur within the UMTS receive band up to the frequency of 1955 MHz. This is the worst case valid for a GSM 1800/ UMTS co-located site, where the lowest (f1 = 1805 MHz) and highest (f2 = 1880 MHz) GSM 1800 frequency are used (fIM = -1 f1 + 2 f2) on the same site. Therefore, it is recommended for GSM 1800 operators to choose UMTS frequencies above fIM, where in any case no IM3 products of the own GSM 1800 frequencies occur. The probability, that a third order intermodulation product falls into the UMTS receiver band (lower than 1955 MHz) is very low. This is illustrated by the following equations: fIM = -1 f1 + 2 f2 f1 < -1 f1 + f2 = D; On site used GSM 1800 frequency band fIM = D + f2 < 1920 MHz < D f2 max = 1880 MHz D < 40 MHZ 1920 MHz f2 < 1920 MHz f2
If the GSM 1800 frequency band used within the same site is smaller than 40 MHz (which corresponds to 200 GSM carrier frequencies), no IM3 products fall in the UMTS receive band. This is also valid for a larger used GSM 1800 frequency band, when the highest GSM 1800 frequency is lower than 1880 MHz (f2 max <1880 MHz). Thus, intermodulation interference is in most cases not relevant, because a distance between lowest and highest carrier frequency of 40 MHz will hardly be used within the same site. In cases intermodulation products are falling in a used receive band, decoupling requirements have to be derived accordingly. The following example should show how this can be done in a defined case:
EXAMPLE:
GSM 1800 TX: f1 = 1879.8 MHz and f2 = 1820 MHz, UMTS RX: f = 1939.6 MHz The third-order intermodulation product of the GSM 1800 transmitters falls into the UMTS receive band (2 * 1879.8 MHz 1820 MHz = 1936.6 MHz). The UMTS receivers noise floor is assumed to be 104 dBm. Allowing 0.4 dB UMTS receiver degradation the acceptable intermodulation level at the UMTS antenna connector is approximately 114 dBm within the 3.84 MHz channel bandwidth. P = 46 dBm each at antenna connector
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 125/19 8
Case 1: Intermodulation in the GSM 1800 transmitters According to the GSM recommendation 05.05, the inband intermodulation attenuation has to be 70 dBc13 in 300 kHz bandwidth. For a transmit power of 46 dBm, this means an intermodulation power of -24 dBm. The TX filter within the ANC module of the Alcatel EVOLIUM GSM 1800 BTS suppresses this level by at least additional 40dB within the UMTS receive band. At the GSM 1800 antenna connector the intermodulation level is therefore 64 dBm. To achieve the required intermodulation level of 114 dBm at the UMTS antenna connector, an additional attenuation of 50 dB by the GSM/ UMTS diplexer or air decoupling is required. An additional margin of 5 to 10 dB should be taken into account, because the total intermodulation power is distributed over a 600 kHz bandwidth (additional 3 dB) and more than one GSM intermodulation product may fall inside a UMTS receive channel. The required decoupling therefore would be 55 dB to 60 dB. Case 2: Intermodulation in the UMTS receiver According to the ETSI G3PP specification TS 25.104, the inband interfering signal level for the UMTS receiver has to be 48 dBm. At this interfering level a wanted signal with a level of -115 dBm can be received. An additional margin of 5 dB for the interfering level is taken into account in order not to degrade a wanted signal at a level of 124 dBm (reference sensitivity level, Alcatel). The allowed interfere level without UMTS receive filter would be 48dBm 5 dB = -53 dBm. For GSM 1800 transmit signals the Alcatel receive filter will provide 90 dB suppression. With this filter the allowed interfere level at the UMTS antenna connector is +37 dBm. Therefore 9 dB decoupling is already sufficient (TX power = 46 dBm). This is less than in case 1. Case 3: Intermodulation at the diplexer In the case where a diplexer is used, the GSM transmitters have power levels of about 46 dBm at the antenna connector of the diplexer The allowed intermodulation power level is 114 dBm14. The attenuation has to be 160 dBc. This value is very critical for the diplexer and the antenna system. It is suggested to avoid this scenario by careful frequency planning.
13
dBc referes to a value below carrier, meaning that the useful power of the carrier is the reference power, the dBc values indicate the difference in dB compared with this carrier power 14 This acceptable interference power is derived analogously to the calculation in chapter 7.6.1.2.1 ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 126/19 8
7.6.1.5 Summary on the requi red decoupling In order to prevent performance degradation for co-located mobile systems, Alcatel proposes due to the three interference mechanisms the following decoupling requirements: GSM 900 (RX)
Specificatio GSM n according 05.05 to: GSM 05.05 Alcatel
GSM 1800 (RX)

GSM 05.05 Alcatel
UMTS (RX)
3G TS Alcatel 25.104
85 dB
GSM spurious
85 dB
GSM spurious
GSM 900 (TX)

Alcatel GSM 05.05
61 dB
Blocking
30 dB 85 dB
GSM spurious
85 dB
GSM spurious
GSM 1800 (TX)
Alcatel
62 dB
Blocking
47 dB
GSM spurious
UMTS (TX)
3G TS 35 dB 30 dB Blocking 25.104 Alcatel
43 dB
Blocking
30 dB 30 dB
35
dB 30 dB
43 dB
Blocking
Blocking
It is assumed, that the decoupling provided by the antenna/diplexer system is at least 30 dB. In fact, using Alcatel EVOLIUM equipment requires for certain combinations even less isolation than those 30dB Intermodulation (if applicable) has to be treated case by case
Table 42: Required decoupling
7.6.2 Antenna System Soluti ons 7.6.2.1 Dual Band Sites 7.6.2.1.1 GSM1800 with UMTS
7.6.2.1.1.1 Air decoupling with Sin gle Band Antennas

Figure 53 shows a schematic representation of the air decoupling configuration for single band antennas. A feeder cable to a GSM 1800 single-band antenna connects the GSM 1800 BTS. Similar, an extra feeder cable to an UMTS single-band antenna connects the UMTS node B. It has to be noted that this configuration has to be doubled for the second antenna branch (keep in mind that we have mandatory RX diversity for UMTS).
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 127/19 8
GSM 1800 antenna
UMTS antenna
air decoupling
Feeder
Feeder
GSM 1800 BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 53: Schematic representation of air decoupling
The antennas are separated either by a vertical distance dv or by a horizontal distance dh (see Figure 54).
dh
GSM 1800
dv
UMTS
GSM 1800
UMTS
Figure 54: Horizontal and vertical distance of antennas
In case of Alcatel EVOLIUM GSM 1800 equipment is used, the decoupling between GSM 1800 transmit port and UMTS receive port has to be 47 dB. Taking into account a feeder cable loss of 2 dB for each feeder cable, the pure air decoupling has to provide 43 dB of isolation.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 128/19 8
In case of a GSM 1800 BTS fulfilling only the ETSI requirements, the air decoupling has to be 81 dB, which is much more difficult to obtain. In order to determine the required minimum distance between the antenna panels, decoupling measurements have been performed in co-operation with RFS Celwave. As typical examples, two cross-polarized single-band antennas have been used, both antennas with 17 dBi gain and a horizontal beamwidth of 65 degree (APX206515-2T for UMTS, APX186515-2T for GSM 1800, supplier: RFS/ CELWAVE).
7.6.2.1.1.1.1 Horizontal antenna separa tion
Figure 55 shows the decoupling between the -45 branch of the GSM 1800 antenna and the +45 branch of the UMTS antenna, as a function of the frequency, for different horizontal distances, which has to be found the limiting one of all combination of -45 and +45 branches. It has to be noted, that the indicated coupling distances were measured between the two vertical middle axes of the antennas. This means that the coupling distance of 20cm according to Figure 55 refers to the side by side position which is given as dh = 0 m according to Figure 54. Converted into a formula, this leads to: dh = coupling distance minus 0.2 m.
0
-10
Coupling Distance (cm)

-20
20 50 100 150 200
-30
Coupling (dB)
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100 1.7 1.7625 1.825 1.8875 1.95 2.0125 2.075 2.1375 2.2
Frequency (GHz)
Figure 55: Decoupling between -45 plane of GSM 1800 antenna and +45 plane of UMTS antenna over frequency for different horizontal distances
One can see that the two antennas side by side already offer a decoupling of 40 dB, a result which can be expected for the GSM 1800/ UMTS dual band antenna as well. Currently, the antenna suppliers specify their dual-band antennas with 30 dB decoupling only.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 129/19 8
To be better than 43 dB for all relevant frequencies, the coupling distance has to be more than 0.5 m (dh = 0.3 m). With respect to a certain security/error margin, a minimum coupling distance of 1.0 m (dh = 0.8 m) for horizontal separation is recommended15. A decoupling of 81dB cannot be achieved by air decoupling with realistic antenna distances. Therefore, the pure air decoupling solution cannot be applied for a GSM1800 equipment which only fulfills the ETSI requirements. However, if one wishes to use a single band antenna solution in this case, an external filter may be added to the GSM1800 BTS which reduces the decoupling requirements (see chapter 7.6.2.1.1.3.1)
7.6.2.1.1.1.2 Vertical antenna separatio n
Figure 56 shows as an example the decoupling between the -45 branch of the GSM 1800 antenna and the +45 branch of the UMTS antenna, as a function of the frequency, for different vertical distances. It has to be noted, that the distances are measured between the horizontal middle axes of the two antennas. This means if one wants to map the represented distances on the distance dv indicated in Figure 54, which is the distance between the top of the UMTS antenna and the bottom of the GSM 1800 antenna, one has to subtract 1.3 m, which is the length of each antenna. The according formula is: dv = coupling distance minus 1.3 m.
-20
Coupling Distance (cm)

-30
-40
150 200 250 300
Coupling (dB)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100 1.7 1.7625 1.825 1.8875 1.95 2.0125 2.075 2.1375 2.2
Frequency (GHz)
Figure 56: Decoupling between -45 plane of GSM 1800 antenna and +45 plane of UMTS antenna over frequency for different vertical distances
To achieve a decoupling of more than 43 dB within the UMTS frequencies, the coupling distance has to be wider than 1.5 m (dv = 0.2 m). With respect to a certain security/error margin, a minimum coupling distance of 2.0 m (dv = 0.7 m) for vertical separation is recommended16.
15 16
Please note that these values only apply for sector antennas with the same main beam direction. Please note that these values only apply for sector antennas with the same main beam direction. 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 130/19 8
ED MCD
The measurement examples indicate, that an air decoupling of > 81 dB for equipment only fulfilling the ETSI requirements cannot be achieved for the majority of sites, as the antennas have to be too far apart from each other.
7.6.2.1.1.2 Broadband Antenna w ith Diplexer

The required decoupling between the two systems can also be achieved by using a diplexer. It can be used in combination with a broadband antenna which can be realised for GSM 1800 and UMTS since the according bands are so close together in spectrum. Figure 57 shows the schematic representation of a solution using a BTS-side diplexer, one feeder cable and a GSM1800/UMTS broadband antenna. This combination has to be doubled for the second antenna branch. The diplexer has to provide 47 dB (in case of Alcatel EVOLIUM GSM 1800 equipment, 85 dB for ETSI equipment) from the GSM 1800 transmit port to the UMTS receive port. From the UMTS transmit port to the GSM 1800 receive port, 30 dB of isolation is required. The main advantage of the configuration is the need for only one feeder cable and one antenna panel. A disadvantage could be the fact of having the same antenna characteristics for the GSM 1800 and the UMTS band. No different electrical downtilt can be chosen for the two systems.
Broadband antenna
Feeder
Diplexer
GSM 1800 BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 57: Schematic representation of the configuration with diplexer and broadband antenna
7.6.2.1.1.3 Dual Band Antennas

7.6.2.1.1.3.1 GSM1800/UMTS Dual Ba nd Antenna with Additional Filters
A dual band antenna is in fact nothing else than two single band antennas within one panel. According to most antenna suppliers specification, a decoupling of 30dB between the GSM 1800 antenna and the UMTS antenna within this panel can be assumed. However, from Table 42 we know that this is not sufficient, so that we have to reduce the decoupling requirements. This can be done by an external filter.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 131/19 8
The configuration shown schematically in Figure 58 includes an external filter directly after the GSM 1800 BTS, two feeder cables and a GSM 1800/ UMTS dual-band antenna. Again, this combination has to be doubled for the second antenna branch.
Dualband antenna
Feeder
Feeder
Filter
GSM 1800 BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 58: Schematic representation of configuration with an external filter, two feeder cables and a GSM1800/ UMTS dual-band antenna
The filter has to reduce the spurious emissions of the GSM 1800 BTS within the UMTS receive band to achieve the required isolation, while relaxing the antenna decoupling value to 30 dB. Feeder cable losses of 2 dB per feeder cable are taken into account. The filter (with fc = 1900 MHz) lets pass the whole GSM 1800 receive and transmit frequencies, but provides sufficient attenuation within the UMTS band. The stopband (=out-of-band) attenuation a which has to be guaranteed is dependent on the performance of the filter integrated within the GSM 1800 BTS, and therefore on the spurious output power Pspur. The power received from GSM 1800 spurious emissions within the UMTS band at the UMTS receive port shall not be higher than 114 dBm. Cable Loss Lcable is assumed to be 2 dB per cable. According to the ETSI requirements of GSM 05.05, the spurious emission Pspur within the bandwidth of one UMTS carrier is below 29 dBm. For Alcatel GSM 1800 EVOLIUM equipment 67 dBm can be assumed, please refer to Table 33: Decoupling calculation for GSM1800 transmitter noise/ spurious emissions. For the received spurious power, the following equation is valid:
Prec = Pspur - = - 2 Lcable - a air -114dBm

= required = Pspur - Precmax - 2 Lcable - a air
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 132/19 8
ETSI specifications Pspur = -29 dBm Prec,max = -114 dBm Lcable = 4 dB aair = 30 dB
arequired = 51 dB Table 43: Required filter characteristics
Alcatel EVOLIUM equipment Pspur = -67 dBm
GSM1800
arequired = 13 dB
In order to be on the safe side for the filter specification, an additional margin of 5 dB should be considered resulting in an attenuation of 56 dB for the ETSI case, 18 dB for the Alcatel equipment respectively. As a side effect, such a filter reduces the decoupling requirement for blocking of the GSM 1800 RX by the UMTS TX. It has to be noted that such a filter may also be used to reduce the decoupling requirements and therefore the required decoupling distance for the single band antenna solution described in chapter 7.6.2.1.1.1
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 133/19 8
7.6.2.1.1.3.2 GSM1800/UMTS Dual Ba nd Antenna with Two Diplexers
The configuration consists of one BTS-side diplexer, one feeder cable, one antenna side diplexer (preferably integrated in the antenna panel) and a GSM 1800/UMTS dual band antenna consisting of two antennas within one panel. This combination has to be doubled for the second antenna branch.
Dualband antenna
Diplexer
Feeder
Diplexer
GSM 1800 BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 59: Schematic representation of configuration with two diplexers and a GSM 1800/ UMTS dual-band antenna
The BTS-side diplexer has to provide 47 dB of decoupling from GSM 1800 transmit port to UMTS receive port (in case of Alcatel EVOLIUM GSM 1800 equipment). For the antenna side diplexer, a decoupling value of 30 dB is largely sufficient. The advantages of the configuration are that gain and electrical tilt can be chosen differently for GSM 1800 and UMTS. The disadvantage is the necessity of implementing two diplexers.
7.6.2.1.1.4 Summary on GSM1800 /UMTS Solutions

Description Single band antennas with air decoupling, two feeders Advantage Disadvantage Comment For GSM 1800 equipment which only fulfills ETSI requirements concerning spurious, this solution is not possible Existing GSM1800 High visual impact of UMTS antenna system does additional not have to be antenna modified High antenna Different mechanical distance required and electrical downtilt Two feeder cables for GSM1800 and required UMTS antenna possible
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 134/19 8
Broadband antenna with one diplexer and one feeder
different Only one feeder No mechanical or cable required electrical downtilt for Low visual impact GSM1800 and UMTS (existing GSM1800 antenna can be diplexer required replaced by broadband antenna) Different electrical Two feeder required downtilt possible No diplexer required Low visual impact (existing GSM1800 External antenna can be required replaced by dual band antenna) cables
Dual band antenna with two feeders and external filter
No different mechanical downtilt filter
Dual band antenna with one feeder and two diplexers
Only one feeder Two diplexers cable required required (one of them with high decoupling Different electrical requirements, downtilt possible therefore expensive) Low visual impact No different mechanical downtilt
7.6.2.1.2 GSM900 with UMTS
7.6.2.1.2.1 Air decoupling with Sin gle Band Antennas

For the combination of GSM 900 with UMTS, concerning the installation of single-band antennas, no special conditions have to be considered, since 30dB of decoupling are easily obtained. For sector antennas installed in the same main beam direction, in most cases, side by side installation of panel antennas is possible. To be on the secure side, the following values are recommended: Vertical separation: dv=0.3m Horizontal separation: dv=0.5m (only for sector antennas!) If omni antennas are used, horizontal separation is not recommended since the antenna gain increases the required separation drastically.
7.6.2.1.2.2 GSM900/UMTS Dual Ba nd Antennas

A GSM 900/UMTS dual band antenna offers 30dB of decoupling at minimum (according to antenna suppliers specification). Therefore, one can choose either a solution with two feeder cables and without diplexers or with a common feeder cable and two diplexers. Please refer to chapter 7.6.2.2 for a detailed explanation.
7.6.2.1.2.3 Summary on GSM900/ UMTS Solutions

Description Single band antennas with air decoupling, two feeders Advantage Disadvantage of Existing GSM900 antenna High visual impact system does not have to be additional UMTS antenna modified CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 135/19 8
Different mechanical and Two feeder cables required electrical downtilt for GSM900 and UMTS antenna possible
Dual band antenna with two feeders
Different possible
electrical
downtilt Two feeder cables required No different downtilt mechanical
No diplexer required Low visual impact
Dual band antenna with one feeder and two diplexers
Only one required Different possible
feeder
cable Two diplexers required No different downtilt downtilt mechanical
electrical
Low visual impact 7.6.2.2 Feeder Sharing Dual-band systems are realized either with separated single-band antennas or dual-band antennas. For the combination of GSM1800 and UMTS, the third option consists in a broadband antenna. However, if the antenna system supports diversity (note that RX diversity is mandatory for UMTS) at least two antenna branches per BTS sector and mobile system are necessary. This results in four antenna branches for a dual-band BTS sector (except the solution with broadband antennas for GSM 1800 and UMTS, not further described in this document). Thus, without feeder sharing, four feeder cables are necessary. By using additional diplexers, two shared feeder cables are sufficient. The following example with a cross-polarized dual-band antenna describes the feeder sharing. Dual-band antennas are characterized by being suitable for both frequency ranges with separate input connectors. This leads to a double number of antenna connectors, compared to a corresponding single-band antenna; four connectors for dual-polarized dual-band antenna.
Dual-band antenna Dual-band antenna
+45
-45
With integrated diplexers
Without diplexers
Feeder
Diplexer
Diplexer
Feeder
Diplexer Diplexer
Diplexers at BTS location
Dual-band
Dual-band
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 136/19 8
Figure 60: Dual-band antenna, with and without diplexer application
By upgrading the dual-band antennas with additional diplexers (often integrated in the antenna radome), the number of antenna connectors will be reduced by a factor of two. The required feeder system will be the same as for a single-band antenna system. This kind of application requires further base station diplexers with a corresponding resplit function. The additional costs for the diplexers will be justified, if the reduced expenditure of the feeder system is predominant. Especially for the case of migrating a single-band to a dual-band system, the existing feeder system can be used ensuring a fast installation during retrofit. It has to be checked, however, whether the feeder cable fulfils the demands for both systems in terms of losses (the feeder attenuation increases with higher frequencies). Note that for the broadband antenna solution, feeder sharing is the only thinkable solution since there is only one diplexer which is logically installed at the BTS side. 7.6.2.3 Triple Band Sites With respect to the visual impact, triple-band antenna systems will be preferably realized either with single-band and dual-band antennas or with triple-band antennas. Nevertheless, configurations with mono-band antennas are also feasible. The conditions concerning the decoupling requirements can be taken from the dual-band co-located sites. 7.6.2.3.1 With dual-band anten nas In cases dual-band antennas are used the following variants are possible:

GSM 900 single-band antenna, GSM 1800 / UMTS dual-band antenna GSM 900 / GSM 1800 dual-band antenna, UMTS single-band antenna GSM 900 / UMTS dual-band antenna, GSM 1800 single-band antenna
The preferred configuration is dependent on the existing antenna system and the evolution steps to a triple-band site. The network planning aspects pose a further requirement on the antenna arrangement. 7.6.2.3.2 With triple-band anten nas Triple-band antennas are necessary for those existing antenna sites using only one antenna per sector and where additional panels are not allowed due to the visual impact.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 137/19 8
Triple-band antenna
Feeder
Connection Matrix
GSM 900 BTS
GSM 1800 BTS
UMTS Node B
Figure 61: Triple-band antenna
An isolation of 30 dB is not enough for the decoupling between GSM 1800 and UMTS. Therefore additional components must be implemented in order to fulfil the decoupling requirements (use of diplexer), or to decrease the decoupling requirements (use of GSM 1800 TX filter). The connection possibilities are the same as already presented for the dual-band sites GSM 1800 and UMTS. Figure 62 reminds the diplexer and filter solution:
Connection matrix
Diplexer
Feeder Feeder Feeder
Diplexer
Filter
GSM 1800
UMTS
GSM 1800
UMTS
Diplexer application
Filter application
Figure 62: Connection possibilities for triple-band antenna
7.6.2.3.3 Feeder Sharing A separated triple-band antenna system with diversity support needs at least six feeders per sector. With feeder sharing, this amount can be reduced. The minimum number per sector is two. In order to fulfil the need to have only two feeder cables per sector for all three bands, the use of triplexers are necessary. The following picture illustrates the triplexer application consisting of two diplexers in combination with a triple-band antenna. ED MCD 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 138/19 8
GSM 900
Triple-band antenna
GSM 1800 UMTS
Antenna system
Diplexer Diplexer
Triplexer
Feeder system
Triplexer
Diplexer
Diplexer
GSM 900
GSM 1800
UMTS
BTS systems
Figure 63:Triplexer application
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 139/19 8
If only diplexing between two mobile systems is applied, please refer to 7.6.2.1, four antenna feeder cables per sector are then required. One representative application is the diplexing of the GSM 1800 and UMTS mobile system. This leads to separated feeder cables between the GSM 900 and the GSM1800/ UMTS systems. Further benefits are: Flexible choice of the feeder type (because the feeder attenuation increases with the frequency)
Diplexers improve at the same the decoupling between the systems which is, as we know, critical between GSM1800 and UMTS
GSM 900
Triple-band antenna
GSM 1800 UMTS
Antenna system
Diplexer
Feeder system
Diplexer
GSM 900
GSM 1800
UMTS
BTS systems
Figure 64: GSM 1800 / UMTS diplexing at triple-band site
7.6.2.3.3.1 Additional losses
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 140/19 8
The feeder sharing benefits have to be paid for with slightly increased losses in the feeder system. The next table collects the additional losses: Component Diplexer GSM 900 - GSM 1800 Diplexer GSM 900 - GSM1800 / UMTS Diplexer GSM 900 - UMTS Diplexer GSM 1800 - UMTS GSM 1800 filter
Table 44: Feeder sharing losses
Loss 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.5 dB 0.4 dB
The feeder sharing influence on feeders system performance is clarified with the following example (Figure 65)

GSM 900
Task: An existing GSM 900 antenna system shall be extended to a triple-band GSM 900/ GSM 1800/ UMTS system. Condition: Because of space constraints, the existing feeder cables have to be shared for all frequency bands. Solution: Use of diplexers (triplexers) for feeder sharing.
Antenna systems
GSM 900 GSM 1800 UMTS
Diplexer Diplexer
Triplexer
Feeder system
Diplexer
Triplexer
Diplexer
GSM 900
BTS systems
GSM 900
GSM 1800
UMTS
Figure 65: Feeder sharing task
Influence of feeder sharing (losses in dB) Components

2 Diplexers 1800 GSM
GSM 900
900-GSM 0.6
GSM 1800
0.6
UMTS
0.6
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 141/19 8
Influence of feeder sharing (losses in dB)

2 Diplexers GSM 1800-UMTS Additional (jumpers, connectors) losses 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.5
1)
Total loss
1.1
2.1
2.1
1)
Table 45: Example for additional losses
Note: Remark: GSM1800/ UMTS signals have 50 % more signal attenuation compared with GSM 900
signals over the same feeder cable.
7.6.2.3.4 Antenna Feeders Apart from the higher loss experienced in the 2GHz band compared with the 900 and 1800MHz GSM bands, UTRAN networks impose no additional restrictions on the choice of antenna feeder cable compared to those applicable to GSM networks. When upgrading an existing 1800MHz antenna system (or dual 900/1800MHz band) for simultaneous operation at 2GHz, the additional frequency dependent feeder loss is unlikely to be significant. It is normally possible to use the existing 1800MHz feeder for both services, provided that the additional loss associated with the dual (GSM/UMTS) band diplexers (cross-band couplers) is acceptable. Using an existing 900 MHz band feeder for UMTS services may introduce unacceptable loss except where the feeder length is relatively short. The combination of longitudinal loss in the feeder together with insertion losses in the two dual (GSM/UMTS) band diplexers (one at each end of the feeder) may become unacceptable. Factors to be taken into account when considering a common antenna feeder system for a UMTS/GSM network are the same as for a dual band GSM 900/1800MHz network. The following table compares attenuation of common types of antenna feeder at 900MHz, 1800MHz, and 2000MHz:
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 142/19 8
Foam Dielectric Cable Nom. Diameter Attenuation at 894 MHz

0.72dB for 10m length 1.80dB for 25m length 3.61dB for 50m length 7.22dB for 100m length
Attenuation at 1.7 GHz

1.03dB for 10m length 2.57dB for 25m length 5.15dB for 50m length 10.3dB for 100m length 0.59dB for 10m length 1.47dB for 25m length 2.93dB for 50m length 5.87dB for 100m length 0.42dB for 10m length 1.05dB for 25m length 2.10dB for 50m length 4.21dB for 100m length
Attenuation at 2 GHz
1.13dB for 10m length 2.82dB for 25m length 5.65dB for 50m length 11.3dB for 100m length 0.65dB for 10m length 1.61dB for 25m length 3.23dB for 50m length 6.46dB for 100m length 0.48dB for 10m length 1.19dB for 25m length 2.38dB for 50m length 4.77dB for 100m length
7/8
Table 46 Comparison of antenna feeder loss
7.6.2.3.5 MHA in Co-location Co nfigurations A MHA "transforms" the BTS input to the antenna connector of the MHA, compensating for the feeder losses. The calculation of the respective required decoupling is similar to the process described in the document so far. The differences:

For the noise / spurious response calculation, the feeder loss can no longer be taken into consideration for reducing the interference signal. The signal delivered by the MHA to the BTS receiver can be higher, resulting in blocking. The low noise amplifier in the MHA has its own blocking limit to be considered.
In the following, two GSM/UMTS co-location configurations with MHA are shown. 7.6.2.3.6 One feeder cable with UMTS Mast Head Unit Since in GSM, we are for most power budgets not uplink limited thanks to the high sensitivity of the EVOLIUMTM BTS, a configuration where only the UMTS part (which benefits from a RX loss reduction) is equipped with a mast head amplifier does make sense.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 143/19 8
Ground Equipment
Feeder Cable Diplexer
GSM UMTS
Mast Head Unit

Dual Band Antenna GSM UMTS
Duplexer
RF
RF + DC ANXU
DC Feed
RF
LNA
UMTS MHA
GSM BTS
UMTS BTS
Diplexer
Duplexer
RF + DC
Feeder Cable
Figure 66 Configuration with one feeder cable and UMTS mast head unit
7.6.2.3.7 Two feeder cables with GSM and UMTS Mast Head Unit
Ground Equipment
GSM
Mast Head Units

Dual Band Antenna
GSM
UMTS
UMTS
Feeder Cables RF + DC
Bias T
RF + DC
Duplexer
Duplexer LNA LNA
GSM
MHA
UMTS MHA
DC Feeds
Duplexer
Duplexer
ANCG/ GSM BTS
ANXU
RF + DC RF + DC
UMTS BTS
GSM Feeder Cable UMTS Feeder Cable
Figure 67: Configuration with two feeder cables and mast head unit for GSM and UMTS
Since the ANCG does not incorporate a DC Feed for a Mast Head Unit, a Bias T has to be introduced to assure the DC feed by the feeder cable.
ED MCD
02
5-Apr-2001 144/19 8
7.6.3 Outlook to the future: Smart antennas (beam-forming)

The beam-forming concept consists in covering each sector by narrow beams with larger antenna gain than conventional antenna diversity where each antenna covers the whole sector. This technique relies on a linear antennas array (also known as smart antennas) in which the antennas spacing is of the order of half the wavelength (about 7.5 cm in UMTS).
4 beams 4 beams
Figure 68: Adaptive beam-forming (on the left) vs. fixed beam-forming (on the right)
As illustrated in the figure, two main types of beam-forming exist:

Fixed beam-forming that consists in having several fixed beams covering each sector and selecting the antenna that receives the signal with largest power, Adaptive beam-forming (also called adaptive arrays) where the received signals on the different antennas are weighted and combined to maximize the signal-to-interference ratio. It enables to have a large antenna gain in the direction of the useful signal and a low antenna gain in the direction of interferers. A simplified algorithm is also possible where only the signal-to-noise ratio is maximized, which enables to decrease the complexity but reduces the performance gain.
The advantage of fixed beam-forming is to have a lower complexity: no weight estimation is required and the data estimation is performed only once (whatever the number of antennas) compared to as many times as the number of antennas for the adaptive beam-forming. However, the performance gain of adaptive beam forming is larger since it enables to get a diversity gain in addition to the larger antenna gain achieved by both techniques. Beam-forming may be used in uplink and in downlink. However, since in the FDD mode of UMTS, the downlink and uplink are on different frequency carriers, the fast fadings of both links are not correlated. Therefore, the best antenna (fixed beam-forming) or the optimum weights (adaptive beam-forming) estimated from the uplink signal cannot be used in downlink. A solution consists in using uplink weights averaged over a sufficient period of time (typically 100 ms) in downlink in order to remove the impact of fast fading and retrieve the correlation between uplink and downlink signals. However, in this case, the performance gain is lower than in uplink.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 145/19 8
MCD
8 PRODUCTS AND MIG RATION STRATEGIES

References [MIG02] [UMTSRM] [RNCV1] [MBSV1 [FL0] [UMTSLB] [GPRSRNP] [OMCV1] [MMSN] [SysDesign] [RadPerf] Migration Strategies towards 3G & Products Draft 02 UMTS Roadmap: Status November 2000 Evolium UMTS Radio Network Controller pd_RNC_LCEd1.doc MBS V1 Features List (internal) Technical Feature List Status: November 2000 (R1,R2,R3) FL0.7U_EC Technical.xls
Typical link budgets for UMTS FDD macrocells UMTS-link-budget-Eb2.doc) GPRS/E-GPRS RNP aspectsRef. Nr.: 3DF 0095 0005 UAZZA Evolium UMTS OMC-R Product description Ref. Nr: 3DC 2176 0005 TQZZA Migration to multiservice Networks ( K.Daniel) Migation_to_GERAN.ppt UTRAN system Design Document Ed.7, 3BK 10240 0005 DSZZA UTRAN Radio Performance Requirement, 3BK112400014DSZZA
Both the technical feature list and the roadmap are from November 2000, they might vary in a short/long term
8.1 Introduction
This document describes the radio access network migration from the second generation of mobile communications (GSM, GPRS) towards the third one (UMTS, E-GPRS) as proposed by Alcatel. While GSM is based on a circuit switched concept, GPRS has been introduced to provide end-to-end packet-switched data transmission. With E-GPRS the next step of the GPRS evolution is introduced, by enhancing data rates with the Edge feature [GPRS-RNP]. The Radio Access Network (RAN) evolution, which is divided in several releases is described, as well as the related Alcatel products for each RAN release. The key features provided in each RAN release are also pointed out in this document. In the last section migration strategies for incumbent operators and Greenfield operators are given.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 146/19 8
MCD
8.2 ROADMAP: RADIO ACC ESS NETWORK EVOLUTION

The Alcatel/Fujitsu view on the evolution of the RAN towards 3G (UMTS/E-GPRS) consists of three releases, called 3GR1 or R1, 3GR2 or R2 and 3GR3 or R3. With each release new products and features are provided, the roadmap is shown in figure 1. Each of these releases will be described in the following sections. The table given in Annex A summarizes further RNP relevant features planned for the three UMTS releases [FL0].
Node B
PRODUCTS
V1 V2 V1 V2
RNC
OMC
V1 V2
Releases
3GR1.1
R1.2 R1.3 R2.0
R2.1
R3
Figure 69 Alcatel RAN Migration Roadmap (Status November 2000)
8.2.1 RELEASE 1: UMTS OVER LAY NETWORK

The first release called 3GR1 is based on the 3GPP Release of March and June 2000 specifications. At this stage, an UMTS layer, able to operate UTRA-FDD only, will be deployed as overlay and independent of the existing GSM/GPRS network. This network release will be developed in three phases, which are called R1.1, R1.2 and R1.3, introducing new hardware elements and new features. The Node Bs are called the MBS V1 (i.e. Version 1 of the Multistandard Base Station), although it is only UMTS capable, as well as the RNCs and OMC-Rs. In the last phase of the 3GR1 release (R1.3) the V2 Multi-standard Base station will be available. It will be able to allow GSM and UMTS TRXs in the same cabinet. In the 2G layer, GPRS functionality can be achieved with the HW releases G1 and G2 (basic GPRS capabilities) and G3 to G5 of Evolium HW equipment and the B6.2 SW release. The MFS, SGSN and GGSN are also part of the GPRS network. For more information on the 2G layer refer to [GPRSRNP]. Site sharing, and therefore transmission resources sharing, between Node B and BTS, is also possible and recommended in order to save costs. For more information about site sharing see chapter 7 of this guideline.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 147/19 8
MCD
The most important supported features of Release R1 are listed in Table 47. Please see reference [FL0] to see the complete technical feature list:
Feature
FDD mode Compatibility with UMTS 3GPP version March 00 Compatibility with UMTS 3GPP version June 00 Power control Adaptive Multirate Codec STTD (Space Time Transmit Diversity) Soft & softer HO Intra cell hard HO Inter cell- Intra RNC cell reselection Inter cell- Inter RNC hard HO and cell reselection UMTS GSM circuit HO UMTS GPRS packet HO
Table 47: 3GR1 RAN most important features. Ref[FL0]
Release/Phase
R1.1 R1.1 R1.2 R1.1 R1.1 R1.1 R1.1 R1.1 R1.1 R1.1 R1.2 R1.2
Note that handover between UMTS and GSM or UMTS and GPRS are only possible in one direction with Release R1.2.
Figure 2 shows the RAN architecture of the 3GR1.1 release implemented as an overlay network in case of GSM/GPRS/UMTS coexistence.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 148/19 8
MCD
UMTS OMC-R Iu-CS Iu-PS Iub
Node B UMTS RNC SGSN GPRS

Iur Gn?
Iub
backbone
Node B
Iub
UMTS RNC
Gb
MSC/VLR Circuit core network (PSTN)
GGSN
IP network (Internet)
Node B
A Abis Abis
X.25 IRouter
BSC/MFS
X.25 GSM OMC-R
BTS BTS
Figure 70: RAN architecture of the 3GR1.1 release (GSM/GPRS/UMTS) coexistence
8.2.2 RELEASE 2: UMTS/GSM NETWORK INTEGRATION

With release 2 a first integration between both networks takes place, with the introduction of the real multi-standard equipment. The operation and maintenance functions can be carried out by one OMC-R (V2) . Further with the introduction of the multi-standard RNC V2 and MBS V2 the same platform can be used for GSM and UMTS as shown in figure 3. The network layer protocol can be ATM with IP. The main features introduced with this release are summarized in table 2.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 149/19 8
MCD
UMTS/GSM OMC-R V2
Iu-CS Iu-PS
Node B (MBS V1) RNC/BSC GSM/UMTS (RNC V2) Node B/BTS (MBS V2)
Gb
SGSN GPRS
Gn
backbone
GGSN MSC/VLR BSC/MFS Circuit Core Network (PSTN) IP network (Internet)
BTS BTS
GSM OMC-R
Figure 71: Release 3GR2.1(R2.1) integrated RAN architecture
Feature Queuing (Radio resource management) Priority(Radio resource management) Inter-cell Intra RNC hard HO GSM circuit- UMTS HO Support of micro-cellular and hierarchical cell structure GPRS packet UMTS HO SSDT (Site Selection Diversity Transmission) Node B overload detection RNC overload detection
Table 48: Release 3GR2 mean features. Ref [FL0]
Release R2.0 R2.0 R2.0 R2.0 R2.0 R2.0 R2.0 R2.0 R2.0
8.2.3 RELEASE 3GR3: UNIFIE D RAN ARCHITECTURE

This radio access network release architecture is based on the release 5 of the September 2000 status of the 3GPP specifications. This RAN architecture is common for UMTS and GSM/GPRS systems. Both UTRA-TDD and UTRAFDD modes can be supported. GERAN (GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network) will be also supported by this network release being connected to the UMTS and to the GSM core network.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 150/19 8
MCD
The transport layer protocol will be unified for GSM, E-GPRS and UMTS and can be ATM with IP (as recommended by Alcatel). The radio access network structure for the third release is shown in Figure 72.
UMTS/GSM OMC-R V2
Iu-CS
SGSN Node B (MBS V1) RNC/BSC GSM/UMTS

Gn
Iu-PS/Gb
GPRS backbone
GGSN MSC/VLR Node B/BTS (MBS V2) BTS Circuit Core network (PSTN) IP network (Internet)
Figure 72 uniform RAN structure for the 3GR3 release Other features planned for this network release are : Microcells and associated Micro Node B, interference cancellation, Multi User Detection as well as the usage of Adaptive Array Antennas.
8.2.4 What is GERAN?

GERAN (GSM-EDGE Radio Access Network): GERAN is a terrestrial RAN, that will be connected to an UMTS and a GSM core network, to offer multimedia services using GSM/EDGE radio technology. GERAN is recommended for: GSM operators that will not get an UMTS license GSM-UMTS operators to provide UMTS-like features at a lower cost GERAN standardization:
GERAN standards formerly handled by ETSI as GSM standards GERAN now part of 3GPP and therefore follows 3GPP release schedule R4 target: March 2001 R5 target: December 2001
- Technical Specification Group GERAN deals with both: GSM, GPRS, EDGE specifications (pre-R99) and, pure GERAN specifications (R4 and beyond)
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 151/19 8
MCD
MS
Um
BTS
Iu-ps Gb
BSC
BTS Iur
A Iu-cs (ffs)
BSC
GERAN GSM/UMTS Core Network
Figure 73 GERAN architecture
GERAN is planned to be supported with the 3GR3 Alcatel radio access network release. GERAN is a platform that provides the four UMTS bearer classes: conversational, streaming, interactive and background.
8.2.5 Interoperability in a m ulti-vendor environment

In the 3GPP specifications, the UMTS radio access network (UTRAN) interfaces (Iub, Iur, Iu) are fully specified, therefore no compatibility problems should appear when combining equipment from different suppliers in the same network. However, there are not any compatibility tests results available, which demonstrate that UMTS equipment from different suppliers can be used within the same network without problems.
8.3 PRODUCTS
Along the migration process from GSM into UMTS new network elements are planned to be introduced for a certain network release. However the RNC V2, OMC-R V2 and the Micro Node B are neither fully specified nor developed and should be mentioned in this document only for an outlook.
8.3.1 Evolium Node B (MBS V1)

The Evolium Node B is officially called MBS V1 (Multi-standard Base Station Version 1) for marketing reasons, although it can support only UMTS FDD mode. The main features are described hereafter, for more information see Annex B.

Developed by Fujitsu UMTS capable Evolium single Rack Indoor and outdoor configurations available Up to 6 TRX, 6 sectors Base band (BB) board capacity limited (4 boards needed, for a minimal 3*1, 16 AMR Channels) DSCH function not supported Multi-standard not possible
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 152/19 8
MCD
Available for 3GR1 R1.1 release IP transport possible Can be extended by carriers, sectors or BB processing capacity
8.3.1.1 Possible configuration s within one cabinet

An overview on all available configurations according to [SysDesign] is given in Table 49
Table 49: Available MBS1 configurations within one cabinet for 3GR1.1.
Configuration Carriers Sectors /sector 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 4 6 1 1 Tx diversity no yes no yes yes no yes no yes yes no yes no yes no no Tx power per.. sector carrier [W] [W] 20 20 20 20 14 7 14 7 12.6 4.2 20 20 20 20 14 7 14 7 12.6 4.2 20 20 20 20 14 7 14 7 20 20 20 20 Required no of modules TRX 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 4 4 6 3 3 6 6 4 6 TPA 1 2 1 2 2 2 4 2 4 4 3 6 3 6 4 6 ANXU 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 6
Note:TPA = Transmit Power Amplifier / ANXU = Integrated Antenna Network for UMTS
8.3.1.2 Baseband board capa bilities

The Node B can have a maximum of 9 BB modules in 3GR1.1, desirable to have 18 modules in the future. The BB module has two modes, Dedicated channel mode and Common channel mode, and it can be changed by the software. The processing capacity of one BB module in each mode is as follows (see Table 50)
Table 50: Baseband board capabilities
Mode Dedicated channel mode Processing capacity One of the following set of DCH can be processed by one module, - 16 DCHs for AMR voice or - 4 DCHs for 64kbps service or - 2 DCHs for 128kbps service or - 1 DCH for 384kbps service The mixed traffic of the three services from the top in the above list also can be processed by one module. In this case, if the following formula is satisfied, the one BB module shall be able to process it. A*(1/16) + B*(1/4) + C*(1/2) <= 1 where, A = No of AMR, B = No of 64k, C = No of 128k.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 153/19 8
MCD
Mode Common channel mode
Processing capacity Any DCH on any BB module can be assigned to any sector carrier freely. One module can process the following set of common channel as the maximum - 2 P-CCPCHs - 4 S-CCPCHs - 8 AICHs - 2 CPICHs - 2 PICHs - 2 SCHs - 16 PRACHs This set of common channels on one BB module can be applied to only one sector-carrier.
In case the enhanced BB (capacity increased version) module is released, the Node B can operate different type of BB modules simultaneously. Baseband modules can be added/removed during normal operation of the Node B.
8.3.1.3 Radio performance va lues of MBS V1

Radio performance data of the MBSV1 in release 3GR1.1 are given hereafter.
Radio feature Supported UL frequency band Supported DL frequency band FDD TX/RX separation Charrier spacing Output power of Node B PC step size for inner loop Max. power of dedicated channel Min. power of dedicated channel Max. power of NodeB Min. power of NodeB CPICH power accuracy Occupied bandwidth Spectrum emission mask Adjacent channel emissions Spurious emission Performance 1920 1980 MHz 2110 2170 MHz The TX amplifier is able to amplify a 20 MHz bandwidth without software modification. 190 MHz 5MHz, possibility to fine tune in 200kHz steps 2 dB for normal conditions, 2.5 for extreme cond. 0.5 dB / 1 dB P_DedChannel_max = P_NodeB_max - 3 dB P_DedChannel_min = P_NodeB_max 28 dB P_NodeB_max P_NodeB_min = P_NodeB_max 18 dB Within 2.1 dB compared to what is included in signaling message >99% of the transmitted spectrum are within 5MHz Is given in [RadPerf] 5 MHz: ACLR > 45 dB 10 MHz: ACLR > 50 dB ACLR = Adjacent channel leakage power ratio Overall < -13 dBm 1850-1910 MHz < -96 dBm at TX antenna connector 1920-1980 MHz < -96 dBm at TX antenna connector 921 960 MHz < -68 dBm to protect GSM 900 MS RX 876 915 MHz < -98 dBm to protect GSM 900 BS RX 1805 1880 MHz < -77 dBm to protect GSM 1800 MS RX 1710 1785 MHz > -100 dBm to protect GSM 1800 BTS RX For spurious emissions to adjacent channels of UMTS FDD see [RadPerf] Guaranteed at antenna connector: 121.5 dBm with BER<0.001 / no RX diversity 124 dBm with BER<0.001 / with RX diversity Typical is 1 dB better. Co-channel: C=-91 dBm , I=-73dBm -> C/I=-18dBm Adj.-Channel: C=-115 dBm , I=-52dBm -> C/I=-63dBm
Sensitivities
C/I requirements for a 12.2 Kbit/s channel:
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 154/19 8
MCD
Radio feature Blocking characteristics (interferer more than one channel apart)
Receiver performance Transmit diversity Redundancy of TRX modules
Performance 1900-2000MHz: C=-115dBm, I=-40dBm -> C/I=-75dB (interferer is a WCDMA signal with one code) 1-1900MHz and 2000-12750 MHz: C=-115dBm, I=-15dBm -> C/I=-100dB (interferer is a CW carrier) Total noise figure <4dB, typical <3dB ANXU mandatory, MHA optional STTD is applied to PCCPCH, SCCPCH, DPCH, AICH, PICH TSTD is applied to SCH only. In case of failure of an TRX module, the calls are moved to another TRX module of another sector, while maintaining the same RX and TX antennas. Thus it looks like two sectors became one.
Find more details in [RadPerf].
8.3.1.4 Iub interface to RNC

An E1 link is used to connect the MBS V1 to the RNC.
Type E1 Rate [Mbps] 2.048 Ports /module 4 Modules/ Node B 1 Term. [ohm] 75, 120
8.3.2 Evolium MBS V2

The Evolium Multi-standard Base Station Version 2 will be available for the release R1.3. UMTS modules will be plugged into the EVOLIUM GSM BTS. That way , the former Evolium BTS becomes the Evolium MBS V2, that is, GSM BTS and UMTS Node B capabilities within the same cabinet. The main features of this product are listed below:

Developed by Alcatel Multistandard (UMTS/GSM capable): 3 * 2 GSM + 3 * 1 UMTS in one rack, additional UMTS equipment in second rack Up to 12 TRXs per Node B Up to 6 sector per Node B Up to 3 TRXs per sector BB (Base Band processing) board capacity increased (64 AMR channels per board). IP addressing possible Not compatible with MBS V1(BB boards incompatible): Control /BB different and PA/ TRX different.
In Annex C a complete feature list of the MBS V2 is provided.
8.3.3 RNC V1
The first version of the Evolium Radio Network controller will be only UMTS capable, and delivered for the first RAN release. The main features and listed below:
Developed by Alcatel/ Fujitsu
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 155/19 8
MCD
UMTS RNC in 2 cabinets Built around ATM switch. Hardware not optimized Traffic capacity: 500 Erlang + 6 MB/s data
In order to see the RNC V1 complete feature list see Annex D.
8.3.4 RNC Evolution

In the Roadmap shown in section 8.2, one can observe, that a RNC V2 is planned to be available for the RAN release 3GR2. The features of RNC V2 are still under development, and it is not yet much known about them. Anyway it will be a Multistandard RNC, that means, the same RNC will be used for GSM/GPRS and UMTS. On the other hand, the UMTS RNC V1 can be upgraded in order to increase its capacity.
8.3.5 OMC
The definitive features that will belong to the V2 OMC, are not yet consolidated, that is why not much information is provided about this element.
8.3.5.1 OMC V1

Developed by Alcatel-Fujitsu Delivered with release 3GR1 UMTS compatible Made of 2 subsystems:
Element Manager (EM) , on Fujitsu platform: carries out fault management and equipment management. RNO: Carries out QoS follow up and radio configuration management. It is the UMTS adaptation of the GSM application today delivered by Alcatel in GSM networks. PM_DB: Performance Measurements handling. This database relies on METRICA software.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 156/19 8
MCD
UMTS OMC-R
RNO-U
Radio Network Configuration and QoS Monitoring
PM_DB
PM Database
EM
Fault and Equipment Management
RNC
Figure 74 OMC V1 structure
NodeB
Configurations: An UMTS OMC-R configuration is always made of one RNO-U server , one PM-DB server and one or several EM servers
U s e r T e r m in a ls
R N O -U
P M -D B
IP
N e tw o rk
LAN
EM
EM
Figure 75 Example of OMC-R configuration with 2 EM servers
Dimensioning
UMTS OMC-R Number of Maximum number of RNC/NodeB/cells/carriers configuration EM servers Large 1 EM Large 2 EM Large 3 EM Large 4 EM Large 5 EM ED 02 1 2 3 4 5 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc 4 RNC/ 500 NodeB / 1500 cells / 1500 carriers 8 RNC/ 1000 NodeB / 3000 cells / 3000 carriers 12 RNC/ 1500 NodeB / 4500 cells / 4500 carriers 16 RNC/ 2000 NodeB / 6000 cells / 6000 carriers 20 RNC/ 2500 NodeB / 7500 cells / 7500 carriers CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 157/19 8
MCD
Table 51 Capacities of the UMTS OMC-R (V1) different configurations. Ref [OMCV1]
8.3.5.2 OMC V2

GSM and UMTS capable Not yet developed, different scenarios are being considered:
OMC directly connected to the RNC & Node B Possible reuse of EM installed H/W being analyzed OMC connected to the EM RNO / NPA Centralized fault and equipment management
8.4 MIGRATION STRATEGI ES RECOMMENDED BY ALCATEL

In this chapter will be distinguished between two kinds of operators:
Incumbent operators, which are considered here, are those who already have a GSM (2G) license and now have got an UMTS license as well Greenfield operators or new entrants are operators, who only have a UMTS license.
However, both of them are going to face the fact that nowadays mobile (GSM) subscribers are used to get nearly nationwide coverage and large roaming possibilities, and they are not going to abandon this to get multimedia services. Therefore, an interoperability between GSM/GPRS/E-GPRS and UMTS becomes obligatory. The following application strategy is recommended for the different technologies.
EDGE shall be used for small/medium cities (preferably in suburban areas) UTRA FDD & E-GPRS for big towns with suburban and dense urban areas UTRA TDD & E-GPRS for microcell layer, indoor coverage GSM/GPRS for preferably rural areas and voice in all environments
Alcatel proposes different strategies for incumbent and for new entrants, they are described hereafter.
8.4.1 Migration strategy rec ommended for incumbent operators

These operators already own a GSM network, either supplied by Alcatel or by another vendor. In this section we are only going to consider that the existing GSM equipment has been supplied by Alcatel. The migration process proposed for these operators involves three steps:
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 158/19 8
MCD
Step 1: Existing GSM network enhancement by introducing GPRS network wide In this step packet-switched data services can be introduced network wide by the introduction of GPRS. Exemplary cell ranges for GSM and GPRS are given in Table 52 and Table 53 for TU 50. Note that the given cell ranges are considered as being coverage driven and they are unlike in UMTS independent of the traffic. However, the achievable throughputs in these cells depend on the Carrier to Interferer Ratio (C/I) and are therefore dependent on the operators bandwidth and traffic. Thus the given bit rates are only valid under specific radio conditions according to [GPRSRNP].
900, No FH, TU 50 G3 step 1 BTS C.S. Max. bit Rate (Kbit/s) CS1 8 CS2 12 CS3 14.4 CS4 20 G4 BTS CS1 8 CS2 12 CS3 14.4 CS4 20
urban, flat urban, hilly suburban, flat suburban, hilly forest, flat forest, hilly open area, flat open area, hilly
3.52 1.79 5.70 3.24 7.40 5.12 19.72 13.64
2.72 1.37 4.39 2.48 5.71 3.92 15.21 10.46
2.38 1.21 3.86 2.18 5.01 3.46 13.36 9.22
1.37 0.69 2.23 1.25 2.89 1.99 7.71 5.29
3.78 1.90 6.12 3.46 7.95 5.46 21.19 14.57
2.92 1.49 4.72 2.67 6.14 4.22 16.36 11.24
2.56 1.29 4.15 2.34 5.39 3.70 14.38 9.86
1.37 0.69 2.23 1.25 2.89 1.99 7.71 5.29
Table 52 GPRS 900 cell ranges in [km] coverage driven (no interference considered) [GPRSRNP]
1800, No FH, TU 50 G3 step 1 BTS C.S. CS1 CS2 12 CS3 14.4 CS4 20 G4 BTS CS1 8 CS2 12 CS3 14.4 CS4 20
Max. bit Rate (Kbit/s) 8
Urban, flat urban, hilly suburban, flat suburban, hilly forest, flat forest, hilly open area, flat open area, hilly
2.11 1.06 3.43 1.92 4.45 3.06 11.87 8.15
1.63 0.82 2.64 1.49 3.43 2.36 9.15 6.29
1.43 0.72 2.32 1.31 3.02 2.07 8.04 5.51
n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a
2.11 1.06 3.43 1.92 4.45 3.06 11.87 8.15
1.63 0.82 2.64 1.49 3.43 2.36 9.15 6.29
1.43 0.72 2.32 1.31 3.02 2.07 8.04 5.51
n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a
Table 53 GPRS 1800 cell ranges in [km] coverage driven (no interference considered) [GPRSRNP]
Step 2: Introduce E-GPRS in suburban and urban areas In this step the GSM/GPRS spectral efficiency is enhanced and data services at higher bit rates can be introduced especially in suburban and urban areas. Exemplary cell ranges are given in table 9 for TU 50. The given bit rates are possible only under specific radio conditions according to [GPRSRNP].
G4 step 2 BTS MCS1 MCS2 MCS3 MCS4 MCS5 MCS6 MCS7 MCS8 MCS9
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 159/19 8
MCD
Max. Bit rate (Kbit/s) urban, flat urban, hilly suburban, flat suburban, hilly forest, flat forest, hilly open area, flat open area, hilly
8.8 4.20 2.12 6.81 3.82 8.84 6.03 23.57 16.08
11.2 3.69 1.87 5.99 3.37 7.78 5.33 20.74 14.21
14.8 2.85 1.44 4.60 2.60 5.98 4.11 15.94 10.95
17.6 1.98 1.00 3.21 1.82 4.18 2.88 11.13 7.67
22.4 1.66 0.84 2.69 1.52 3.49 2.39 9.30 6.37
29.6 1.45 0.73 2.36 1.33 3.06 2.10 8.16 5.59
44.8 0.92 0.47 1.49 0.84 1.94 1.33 5.17 3.54
54.4 0.86 0.44 1.40 0.79 1.82 1.25 4.85 3.32
59.2 0.64 0.32 1.04 0.59 1.35 0.93 3.60 2.47
Table 54: Typical cell ranges for E-GPRS 900, coverage driven (no interference considered) [GPRSRNP]
G4 step 2 BTS MCS1 MCS2 Max. Bit Rate 8.8 (kbit/s) urban, flat urban, hilly suburban, flat suburban, hilly forest, flat forest, hilly open area, flat open area, hilly 1.98 1.00 3.22 1.81 4.18 2.86 11.15 7.61 11.2 1.76 0.90 2.86 1.62 3.72 2.57 9.92 6.84 MCS3 14.8 1.37 0.69 2.23 1.25 2.89 1.98 7.70 5.27 MCS4 17.6 0.84 0.43 1.37 0.77 1.78 1.22 4.75 3.25 MCS5 22.4 0.94 0.47 1.52 0.86 1.97 1.36 5.25 3.61 MCS6 29.6 0.79 0.40 1.29 0.73 1.67 1.15 4.45 3.07 MCS7 44.8 0.43 0.22 0.69 0.39 0.90 0.62 2.39 1.65 MCS8 54.4 0.39 0.20 0.63 0.35 0.81 0.56 2.17 1.50 MCS9 59.2 n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a n.a
Table 55: Typical cell ranges for E-GPRS 1800, coverage driven (no interference considered) [GPRSRNP]
Step 3: Introduce UMTS in urban and dense urban areas To achieve high quality multimedia services, UMTS is the most convenient technology, as it provides high bit rates and large capacity at the same time. As explained in section 8.2 UMTS will be developed at first as an overlay network, and then, when the multistandard base stations are available, GSM-UMTS BTS/Node B will be available in the same cabinet . In order to save costs site sharing can be also accomplished, for more details about this issue please refer to chapter 7 of this guideline. E-GPRS and GPRS/GSM are good complements for the UMTS technology, mainly in the first years of UMTS operation, where UMTS will be only deployed in urban areas, while E-GPRS, and GPRS/GSM will provide overall coverage. Figure 10 shows the typical coverage scenario for an incumbent operator. GSM/GPRS coverage is introduced networkwide according to step 1. Then E-GPRS is introduced in suburban and urban areas where data services are required. In cities where high bitrate services become necessary UMTS will be applied according to step 3.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 160/19 8
MCD
GSM/GPRS E-GPRS UMTS
Figure 76 Coverage scenario for incumbent operators.
In case of UMTS the achievable cell ranges are dependant on the cell loading. Exemplary cell ranges and achievable bitrates are given in Table 56. With increasing data traffic densification strategies like cell sectorisation, microcells carriers or cells addition must be carried out, similar as it is done for voice in the case of GSM. For more information about this topic please refer to chapter 9 of this guideline.
8.4.2 Migration strategy rec ommended for greenfield operators

Greenfield operators which only have a 3G license will be interested in a rapid deployment of their UMTS network, in order to get as many subscribers as possible. In this case it does not make sense to deploy E-GPRS first. The network deployment will take place in two steps: Step 1: UMTS deployment in urban areas: They will start deploying UMTS only in urban areas, where the demand for multimedia services is much higher. In order to be able to offer full coverage to their subscribers, they will probably need to use incumbent operators networks for the not yet covered zones. Therefore they can make roaming agreements for E-GPRS or GPRS services with other operators, which do not have an UMTS license and which can benefit from the opportunity to offer multimedia services to their customers. Step 2: Overall UMTS coverage The initially deployed UMTS network will be extended to suburban and rural areas. Further network densification strategies as described in chapter 9 might become necessary in the dense urban areas to handle increasing traffic. Exemplary (macro) cell ranges, the site area and the number of subscribers (UE) per carrier of the Node Bs are summarized below in Table 56.
Dense urban
Range km Area Km 0.37 carrier 334
Urban
Area Km 0.80 carrier 334
Sub-urban
UE per Range Km 1.89 Area Km 6.95 carrier 248
Rural
UE per Range km 5.08 Area Km 50.24 UE per carrier 130
UE per Range km 0.64
Lightly loaded
0.43
Typically 0.41 loaded Fully loaded

0.38
0.32
493
0.60
0.70
493
1.76
6.00
360
4.77
44.38
174
0.29
630
0.57
0.63
630
1.71
5.71
426
4.67
42.47
234
Table 56: Approximate cell ranges and UE density per carrier for UMTS [UMTSLB]
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 161/19 8
MCD
Figure 77 shows an approximated coverage scenario for Greenfield operators. Such operators will try to deploy an UMTS network as fast as possible. This process will take much time and will be very costly, therefore they will just start developing an UMTS network in the main urban areas, where the need for high bit rate multimedia services is large. For the rest of the territory they will need roaming arrangements with operators that have a 2G network , either with incumbent operators or with GSM operators that did not get a 3G license. These networks will be also opened to the presence of MVNOs (Mobile Virtual Network Operators) in order to share license fees and even investment costs with other operators and start adding, as soon as possible, subscribers and traffic for their network .
GSM/GPRS E-GPRS UMTS
Figure 77 coverage scenario for Greenfield operators
8.5 Annex A
In this annex , features regarding transmission interfaces (Iub, Iu, Iur), physical and transport channels, channel coding, radio resource management, traffic management, Tele-services, bearer services and security are listed. Ref [FL0].
TRANSMISSION interfaces
Iub Transmission Release Comment
Iub open for equipment from other providers Iub star Iub cascade (VP cross connection by Node B) Iub cascade (AAL2 switching by Node B) Iub redundancy (duplicated VP on duplicated physical interface) GSM in AAL1 circuit emulation
Iu Transmission
2.0 1.1 2.0 NP 2.0 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 NP 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 NP 1.2 1.1 NP 1.1 1.1 NP NP For V1 and V2 Node B
Iu open Iu CS SS7 Iu PS SS7 Iu PS SCTP/IP Iu CS up to 64 kbps bearer Iu PS up to 384 kbps bearer Iu CS and Iu PS multiplexed on the same physical interface Iu CS and Iu PS multiplexed on different physical interfaces O&M flow multiplexed with Iu on the same physical interface
Iur Transmission
Iur open Iur SS7 Iur SCTP/IP Up to 16 Iur interfaces towards 16 RNC Iur and Iu multiplexed on the same physical interface Iur and Iu multiplexed on different physical interfaces
PHYSICAL CHANNELS
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 162/19 8
MCD
First set
1.1
PCPICH / PCCPCH / SCCPCH / PRACH / DPDCH / DPCCH / SCH /PICH
Second set
Transport Channels
2.0 1.1 NP NP 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.0 2.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.0 1.1 1.1 2.0 1.1 1.1 NP 1.2 NP 1.1 1.1 2.0 2.0 1.2 Associated UMTS/GSM HO with
DCH DCH(DRAC) FAUSCH BCH RACH FACH PCH CPCH DSCH One radio access bearer per CCTrCH Multiple radio access bearers on one CCTrCH Multicode
CHANNEL CODING
32 Kbps Convolutional DCH/DCH 64 Kbps Turbo DCH/DCH 128 Kbps Turbo DCH/DCH 144 Kbps Turbo DCH/DCH 384 Kbps Turbo DCH/DCH Error indication mechanisms from L1 Change of transport channel due to QoS CRC attachment Radio interface acc. To 3GPP TS25.212) Compressed mode Puncturing Reduction of SF by 2 Higher layer scheduling Downlink Primary and Secondary scrambling code Uplink Scrambling codes Long scrambling Short scrambling
RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Queuing Classmark handling (FDD only, FDD+TDD, GSM+UMTS) Power Control Open Loop Power Control Closed Loop Power Control Downlink Closed Loop Power Control Slow Downlink Closed Loop Power Control Downlink Closed Loop Power Control in compressed mode Downlink Power balancing Uplink Closed Loop Power Control Code-tree de-fragmentation Priority Adaptive Multirate Codec (AMR) Transmit Diversity scheme 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.0 2.0 1.1 1.1
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 163/19 8
MCD
Support of microcellular and hierarchical cell structure Multiband solutions Intelligent traffic management Location Service
2.0 NP NP NP 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.0 1.1 1.1 Variable up to 12.2 64/64 14.4/14.4, 28.8/28.8, 57.6/57.6, 0/64, 64/0 64/128, 64/384, 384/384 64/128, 64/384, 384/384
BEARER SERVICES
AMR Conversational Streaming Interactive Background Multi RAB AMR + Interactive or Background Conversational + Interactive or Background
TELESERVICES
Emergency call Short Message Service SMS MT/PP SMS MO/PP SMS CB
SECURITY
Authentication Encryption
8.6 Annex B
In this annex , the features of the Multistandard Base Station first version (MBS V1) are listed. Ref [FL0].
Features of MBS V1
Multicarrier TPA with 20 W TX power Support of improved HW RX noise figure < 4 dB Support of up to 6 TPA per Node B Support of up to 6 TRX per Node B Support of up to 9 TRX per Node B
Release
1.1 2.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2.1
Comments
RX sensitivity of -121 dBm (for 12.2 kbps channel, BER < 0.001) 1.1
Only reasonable together with V2 BB board and change of BB / COM
Support of up to 2 TRX per sector Support of up to 3 TRX per sector Support of up 6 sectors per Node B Multi Standard UMTS/GSM configuration Evolium MEDI indoor cabinet for indoor configurations Evolium MEDI outdoor cabinet for outdoor configurations RX diversity TX diversity BB part redundancy PA part redundancy TRX part redundancy COM part redundancy Plug & play - HW ready
1.1 2.1 1.1 NP 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 NP 1.1 1.1 Load sharing Using TX diversity See 70 11 40
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 164/19 8
MCD
Features of MBS V1
Plug & play SW Support of BB modules V1 Support of upgraded BB modules V1 E1 physical interface (3) E3 physical interface (2) STM1 physical interface (optical) STM1 physical interface (electrical) VC4/STM1 VC3/STM1 AAL1 circuit emulation (2 possible circuit E1 as input)
Release
NP 1.1 2.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 NP 1.2 NP 1.2
Comments
16 AMR channels 64 AMR DSCH channels +
Only if Orange
8.7 Annex C
In this annex , the features of the Multistandard Base Station second version (MBS V2) are listed. Ref [FL0].
Features of MBS V2
Multicarrier TPA with 30 W TX power
Release
1.3
Comments
Maximum possible output power per cabinet?
RX noise figure < 4 dB
1.3
RX sensitivity of -121 dBm (for 12.2 kbps channel, BER < 1.3 0.011) Support of up to 6 TPA per Cabinet Support of up to 12 TRX per Node B Support of up to 3 TRX per sector Support of up 6 sectors per Node B Multi Standard UMTS/GSM configuration Evolium MEDI indoor cabinet for indoor configurations Evolium MEDI outdoor cabinet for outdoor configurations Multi Rack configuration RX diversity TX diversity BB part redundancy RF part redundancy TRX part redundancy Plug & play - HW ready Plug & play SW Support of BB modules V2 E1 physical interface IMA nXE1 E3 physical interface STM1 physical interface (optical) STM1 physical interface (electrical) Ethernet 101/10 BaseT physical interface for traffic VC4/STM1 VC3/STM1 AAL1 circuit emulation 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.0 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 NP 1.3 Only if Orange Only in IP option of R'00 64 AMR channels + DSCH Using TX diversity
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 165/19 8
MCD
8.8 Annex D
In this annex , the features of the Radio Network Controller first version (RNC V1) are listed. Ref [FL0]. Features of RNC V1 Release Comments
500 Erlangs + 6 Mbps 1000 Erlangs + 12 Mbps 2000 Erlangs + 24 Mbps 3000 Erlangs + 36 Mbps SPU module increased capacity DHT module increased capacity Support of 96 Node B Support of 256 Node B Support of 512 Node B Clock extraction from STM1 Stratum 3 clock accuracy level Clock extraction from E1 Clock extraction from 2Mhz reference Defense mechanism for Control Unit 1.1 1.1 2.0 2.0 NP NP 1.1 1.2 NP 1.1 1.1 NP NP 2.0 COM 2N, MMUX 6+1 APS 1+1
APS mechanism - STM1 redundancy in transmission 1.2 network Plug & play - HW ready Plug & Play SW E1 physical interface Iub E3 physical interface Iub VC4/STM1 Iub interface VC3/STM1 Iub interface VC4/STM1 optical interface Iub, Iu and Iur VC4/STM1 electrical interface Iub, Iu and Iur ATM Mux/Demux of O&M VC from/to Node B 1.1 NP 1.2 1.2 1.2 NP 1.1 2.0 1.1
Only if Orange Only if Orange
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 166/19 8
MCD
9 DENSIFICATION STRA TEGIES

References [WFU] [ASMC] [CapImp] WCDMA for UMTS. Radio Access for third Generation Mobile Communications. H. Holma, A. Toskala. Ed. J.Wiley & Sons. Edition 2000. Activation Strategy for Microcellular Networks Doc. Ref:3DF 00 995 0000 UFZZA. Nov.98 Alcatel Offer to CG SAT. Capacity Improvement. Doc. Ref.: MAR 80595. Nov.98
9.1 Introduction
A satisfactory UMTS network performance can turn by time into a non-satisfactory one, if after the initial network deployment, the traffic increases considerably. In this chapter, a description of the different strategies that improve networks architecture performance is carried out. It mainly focuses on the downlink capacity due to the following reasons:
In UMTS, the downlink capacity is assumed to be more important that the uplink capacity because of asymmetric downloading type of traffic.
Empty cells are rather uplink limited (i.e. MS are running out of power in case of large cell ranges), but when the traffic increases, the cell sizes are shrinking and the downlink becomes limiting because the Node B needs an extraordinary amount of power to serve all mobiles (i.e. the Node Bs are power limited).
Figure 78 shows this effect quantitative for a macrocell. The maximum pathloss decreases as the cell load and the traffic increases.
165 163 Maximum path loss [dB] 161 159 157 155 153 151 149 147 145
Capacity is downlink limited Coverage is uplink limited
downlink uplink
10 0
20 0
30 0
40 0
50 0
60 0
70 0
80 0
Cell Load [Kbps]
Figure 78: Example of coverage vs. capacity relation in downlink and uplink in macrocells
ED
02
10 00
90 0
5-Apr-2001 167/19 8
MCD
The downlink air interface capacity is smaller than the uplink one: receiver techniques, like receiver antenna diversity and multi-user detection, can be used in the base station but not in the mobile station.
The WCDMA capacity is limited by interference. If the interference level increases, the capacity decreases. The main causes of downlink capacity decrease are:
Traffic increase: After some time of successfully system performance, the number of UMTS subscribers increases so that the up to date capacity resources are not able to satisfy such a high demand. Orthogonality of channelization codes : Due to the multipath channel behavior, the orthogonality between channelization codes is partially lost and the intra-cell user interfere with each other causing intra-cell interference and reducing the downlink capacity. Number of channelization codes: The number of channelization codes available is limited within a scrambling code. If the Spreading Factor is SF, the maximum number of channelization codes is SF. This code limitation can affect the downlink capacity if the propagation environment is favorable, and the network planning and hardware support such a high capacity, that all channelization codes available must be utilized. That is, normally you will run out of DL power before you run out of channelization codes.
If the downlink interference increases due to traffic increase or to any of the causes that have been already mentioned, it will result in downlink power shortage. The power will not be enough to serve all users. Therefore certain active users, depending on the admission control algorithm, will be dropped (for example the mobile demanding the largest power share). In other words, the cell surface will shrink due to cell breathing phenomenon and some holes will appear in the network, where not only coverage but also high capacity is needed. The process mentioned before is illustrated in Figure 79.
B
Traffic increase
Initial status
Consequences of traffic increase: cell breathing Insufficient coverage
Figure 79 Coverage reduction due to traffic increase in a UMTS network
9.2 Densification strategie s

When the demand for UMTS services increases, the capacity of the networks will have to be adapted to the new market requirements.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 168/19 8
MCD
There are some different methods to alleviate the capacity loss of a network, some of them are more costly than others, and therefore a certain hierarchy is established in order to apply the easy ones first and the costly ones as a last resort, in order to save unnecessary costs. Such methods are listed hereafter: If the maximum capacity is limited by the amount of interference in the air interface, soft capacity improvement strategies can be applied, these are listed hereafter:
Traffic management: this includes network fine tuning (e.g. BSS parameters) and GSM/UMTS traffic management. For example, in case the GSM cells are unloaded, while UMTS is overloaded, it can be an option to transfer the UMTS voice traffic to the GSM layer by according BSS parameter settings. Transmit diversity (see chapter 2 of these guidelines for more information about this topic) Lower bit rate codec (see chapter 2 of these guidelines for more information about this topic)
If the previous mentioned solutions are insufficient more effective densification strategies must be applied. Whereas the last one is the most costly one but also the most effective one.
Adding carriers Sectorization Adding cells Micro-cells
A description of each one of these densification strategies is provided in the next sections.
9.2.1 Adding carriers

If the operators frequency allocation allows, the operator can take another carrier into use. WCDMA supports efficient inter-frequency handovers (see Chapter 2 of these guidelines for more info) and several carriers can be utilized to balance the loading and to enhance the capacity per site.
Advantages
It is a very cost efficient method, if the new carrier is available. It is possible to share one power amplifier between several carriers. This provides a more efficient use of the power amplifier, since the loading can be divided between two carriers and the total required transmission power per user is reduced, increasing the capacity.
Disadvantages
The license for a further carrier must be available.
9.2.2 Sectorization
Sectorization consists on dividing cells into two (formerly used for specific coverage scenarios), three (for densification), or even six (has been used in IS-95 CDMA) sub-cells or sectors. The former omni-directional antenna is substituted by a double- or triple- or six- panel antenna system; and the original base station equipment is extended to a two-, three- or six-sector configuration. This is shown in the Figure 80. Due to the sectorization, the traffic per cell (one third of the old omni cell) decreases and therefore the cells sizes increase again.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 169/19 8
MCD
Sector 1
Node B 1 Node B Node B 2 Sector 2
Node B 3
Sector 3
Omni site Figure 80 Principle of cell sectorization Advantages
Tri-sector site
1. Sectorized sites simultaneously offer advantages in terms of coverage and in terms of capacity: Firstly, the radio coverage provided by panel antennas is much easier to tune and to adapt to terrain and building contours; secondly, sectored sites are less sensitive to interference from other sites. In an ideal case N sectors would give N times more capacity, but in practice the sectorization efficiency is typically about 90%. This means that upgrading the site from an omni-site to a three-sector site gives a capacity increase of about 2.7, and to a six-sector site a capacity increase of about 5.4 [WFU]. The increased number of sectors also brings improved coverage through a higher antenna gain. 2. Site sectorization process is also attractive in terms of operational costs, since more capacity can be added without any need for finding and renting new sites.
Disadvantages
If the number of sectors is increased, the antennas must be replaced and therefore the radio network design changes. As the number of antennas increases, there might be problems due to visual impact and civil works.
9.2.3 Adding cells

Adding cells or cell splitting pertains to the same class of network optimization processes than cell sectorization and is considered the next step in densification. If the UMTS traffic density grows significantly, the cells surfaces will shrink due to the breathing cell phenomenon in order to be able to provide the active subscribers with the adequate quality of service. This will cause the appearance of coverage holes in high traffic density areas, due to the fact that the Node B downlink power is not enough to serve all the mobiles. Therefore new Node Bs will be introduced where more capacity is needed.
Advantages
The site density is increased, hence enhancing the offered capacity, supposing that each splitted or added cell is provided with the same number of channels as each original cell.
Drawbacks
1. Cell splitting can be exploited up to the point in which Node Bs become so close to each other that the overall network performance starts worsening:
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 170/19 8
MCD
The soft handover areas are so large that the higher handover activity would negatively affect the network capacity (smallest site distances tbd). The amount of inter cell interference would also significantly increase, and this would also cause a capacity diminution, due to the increasing signaling load.
Hence, beyond a certain limit, it is recommended to implement other spatial densification strategies, such as microcellular solutions. 2. New sites have to be acquired. 3. Even if only a few cells have been split it is necessary a new code allocation?
9.2.4 Microcells
In a UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, a combination of macrocells and microcells in a lower layer can be used in order to solve situations where the macrocell capacity is insufficient. These situations, in which microcells may be required, are the following:
To provide coverage and a higher capacity in hot spots like a shopping mall, a stadium or a business area. To provide indoor coverage and capacity.
Advantages
With microcells, different traffic capacity gains can be achieved, depending on the available channels and the street layout of the considered traffic area. The amount of intercell interference is lower and the orthogonality of the downlink codes higher in the microcells where there is less multipath propagation than in macrocells. On the other hand, less multipath propagation gives less multipath diversity and therefore we assume there is a higher Eb/N0 requirement in microcells than in macrocells. In the Table 57 below exemplary simulation results of data throughputs in micro and macrocellular environments are shown.
Assumptions in the throughputs calculations Macrocell Downlink orthogonality Other cell interference factor UL Eb/No UL loading DL Eb/No DL loading 0.6 0.65 1.5 dB 60% 5.5 dB 80% Microcell 0.95 0.2 1.5 dB 60 % 8.0 dB 80%
Data throughput in macro and microcell environments per sector per carrier Macrocell Uplink Downlink 1040 kbps 660 kbps Microcell 1430 kbps 1440 kbps
Table 57 Comparison between microcell and macrocell environments [WFU]
The simulation results of Table 57 show that in macrocells the uplink throughput is much higher than the downlink one, while in microcells the downlink and uplink capacities are quite balanced.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 171/19 8
MCD
The downlink capacity depends more on the propagation and multipath environment that does the uplink one. The reason is the application of the orthogonal codes.
Drawbacks
In opposite to the conventional macrocells, microcells are characterized by an antenna installation below the rooftop level. Due to the fact that this reduces the minimum distance to the mobiles, the risk of interference is increased, as the Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL) becomes more critical. The worst case would be a mobile, served by a macrocell and transmitting at its maximum power (24 dBm), getting near a full loaded micro Node B with receiving maximum sensitivity. In this scenario, if the distance between the mobile and the micro Node B considerably decreases this may result in the blocking of the micro Node B. This scenario is shown in Figure 81.
Interference
Macro-Cell
Micro-Cell
Figure 81 Microcells scenario , interference between the macro and microcell layer
9.2.4.1 Microcells and macroce lls on the same channel

If this option is chosen, one must take into account the side effects of this method. First, the overlapping of the coverage zones of the macro and the microcell if both work within the same carrier will bring pilot pollution17 and therefore interference rises, if a handover between both cells can not be performed. Hence , the macrocell capacity is reduced, and the addition of the microcell does not represent a linear capacity raise . It would be also possible to make a handover to the microcell every time that the macro cell is pilot polluted, but such a measure would only bring a rise in the handover percentage, that causes a capacity reduction as well.
9.2.4.2 Microcells and macroce lls on different channels

In this case, there are various possibilities to consider, they are summarized hereafter: Option Nr. 1 2 Macrocell Layer FDD FDD Microcell layer FDD TDD
Table 58: Possible hierarchical cells layers configuration
Note: TDD is not available in 3GR1.x. Although in both cases adjacent channel interference problems would appear (see Chapter 10 Multioperator Environment for more information) the option 2 is the recommended one by Alcatel
17
If in the macro cell the received Ec/Io coming from the micro cell is higher than a certain threshold, the micro cell will be considered as a pilot polluter 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 172/19 8
ED
MCD
(see Chapter 8 Migration Strategies for more information). Apart from these issues, there are some other subjects that one must observe when deploying either option 1 or 2
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 173/19 8
MCD
10 MULTI OPERATOR EN VIRONMENT

References: [SitSha] [25.492] [SysPerf] Site Sharing GSM-UMTS. RF aspects Ref: 3DC 21019 0005 TQZZA, Ed. 02 RF system scenarios TR 25.942 V.2.1.3 (2000-03).3GPP 3G TSG RAN R99 UTRAN Radio Performance Requirement, 3BK112400014DSZZA
10.1 Introduction
Adjacent channel interference will affect all wide band systems where guard bands are not possible. We can distinguish between four kinds of ACI sources:
Multi-operator coexistence FDD-FDD (treated in the present document) Multi-mode coexistence TDD-FDD (not content of this guideline) UMTS-GSM (see chapter 7 of these guidelines) coexistence Multi-operator coexistence TDD-TDD (not content of this guideline)
In the present document, the Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) phenomenon caused from Multioperator coexistence FDD-FDD will be treated. Their causes and effects on the network performance will be pointed out, as well as possible solutions and their impact on the network planning strategy to be carried out.
10.2 Adjacent channel inter ference in case of UMTS FDD-FDD co-existence

The adjacent channel interference is caused by transmitting non-ideal and imperfect receiver filtering. In UL and DL the adjacent channel performance is limited by the performance of the mobile. In the UL the main source of ACI is the non-linear power amplifier in the UE, which introduces adjacent channel leakage power. In the DL the limiting factor for ACI is the receiver selectivity of the WCDMA terminal. The co-existence between two operators using adjacent bands has been taken into account in the scenarios of simulations used for specifying the equipment (node B and UE) radio requirements in the 3GPP/WG4 [25.492]. These simulations are referring to co-existence scenarios where the adjacent band operators are not necessarily sharing the same sites but merely operating in the same region. Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR) is the ratio of the transmitted power to the power measured in an adjacent channel. According to [SysPerf], the ACLR shall be higher than the value specified in Table 59 for uplink and downlink.
Adjacent channel relative to channel frequency separation 5 MHz 10 MHz UE ACLR limit 45 dB 50 dB
Table 59Requirements for adjacent channel performance [SysPerf]
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 174/19 8
MCD
NOTE: Requirement on the UE is planned to be reconsidered when the state of the art technology progresses.
10.2.1 Capacity Loss due to a djacent operators co-existence 10.2.1.1 Uplink case
The uplink case denotes the interference coming from UTRA FDD mobiles of an operator A to the UTRA FDD Node B of an operator B as shown in figure 1. In the uplink, the adjacent channel interference causes noise rise, meaning an increase of the wideband interference level over the thermal noise in the Node B reception of operator B. The effect of the adjacent channel interference can be seen as a reduced uplink capacity. Some Monte Carlo system simulations have been performed to quantify the capacity loss due to the presence of an operator in the adjacent band in different co-existence scenarios. For detailed description of the simulated scenarios please refer to [25.942].
Macro cell operator B Macro cell operator A
Interference
Signal
Mobile OperatorA: high transmission Power
Figure 82 Macrocell to Macrocell uplink adjacent channel interference scenario
Table 60 shows exemplary the uplink capacity losses for the FDD macro/ FDD macro case, which can reach up to 13% in some scenarios. The Adjacent Channel Interference Power Ratio (ACIR) given in Table 60 is defined as the ratio of the total power transmitted from a source (Node B OR UE) to the total interference power affecting a victim receiver. The occurring interference corresponds to an approximate cell load as given in Table 60. Two different scenarios have been investigated:
Intermediate case, where the second system Node Bs are located at a half-cell radius shift respect to the first system ones Worst Case, where the second system Node Bs are located at the cell border of the first system
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 175/19 8
MCD
ACIR [dB]
25 30 35 40
Intermediate case Min

9.31% 3.15% 1.11% 0.47%
Worst case Min

13.00% 4.58% 1.43% 0.50%
Max
8.18% 2.60% 0.93% 0.30%
Average
8.85% 2.91% 1.02% 0.35%
Max
11.55% 3.80% 1.10% 0.30%
Average
12.25% 4.19% 1.34% 0.43%
Table 60: Uplink capacity loss in % for the FDD macro/ FDD macro case.
10.2.1.2 Downlink case

The downlink case denotes the interference from UTRA FDD Node B of an operator B to a UTRA FDD UE belonging to an operator A. Operator As mobile is receiving adjacent channel interference in the downlink from operator Bs Node B, this will bring the need to increase the downlink power of operator B allocated to that connection in order to compensate the increased interference in the UE reception. This power increase will allow that mobile to interfere with all other connections of this cell, that is why it is preferable to drop that connection in downlink before the mobile gets extremely close to the operator Bs Node B and causes additionally interference in the uplink connections of operator B (Figure 83).
Macro cell operator B
Signal Interference
Macro cell operator A
Mobile OperatorB
Mobile OperatorA
Figure 83 Macro to macro downlink adjacent channel interference scenario
Table 61 shows exemplary the downlink capacity losses for the FDD macro/ FDD macro case, which can be up to 15% in some scenarios. The same definitions as for Table 2 are valid. The occurring interference corresponds to an approximate cell load as given in Table 61.
ACIR [dB]
25 30 35 40
Intermediate case Min

13.46% 5.84% 2.27% 0.91%
Worst case Average

10.88% 4.70% 1.79% 0.59%
Max
6.50% 2.60% 1.00% 0.10%
Min
15.30% 7.16% 2.80% 1.29%
Max
9.00% 4.50% 1.80% 0.82%
Average
13.28% 6.16% 2.32% 0.99%
Table 61: Downlink capacity loss in % for the FDD macro/ FDD macro case.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 176/19 8
MCD
10.2.1.3 How can it be avoided ?

In order to avoid a decrease of the system performance, some strategies can be carried out when planning the network: Large minimum coupling loss: It is recommended to maintain a coupling loss between Node B and UE antennas as high as possible by choosing appropriate Node B antenna locations, antenna patterns etc. Node B co-location: Different operators should try to co-locate their Node Bs. Therefore, there will not be large power differences at the both operators Node Bs and the adjacent channel attenuation will be enough to fulfil the ACLR requirements (see Table 59) causing no adjacent channel interference problems. Adjustment of carrier spacing: Frequency coordination between the operators should be done where ever possible. The nominal WCDMA carrier spacing is 5 MHz, but can be adjusted within a 200 kHz raster according to the requirements of the adjacent channel interference. Inter-frequency HO: Refer chapter 2 of this guideline. Desensitization: Reduces the sensitivity of the Node B receiver, i.e. increases the noise figure of the Node B RF parts, making the Node B receiver less sensitive. This would also bring a considerable cell range reduction; therefore this method is only recommended for small cells without UL coverage problems.
10.2.2 Dead zones

The dead zone area has been defined in RAN4 as the area close to a Node B, where UEs operating in a neighboring frequency f1 receive and provoke a high level of downlink and uplink interference as described in the previous two sections. This may result in a loss of communication. Note that dead zone areas exist in pure macrocell scenarios as well as in macro/micro scenarios, however the latter are usually more critical since the UE can get much closer to a microcell antenna, causing a small coupling loss between UE and Node B.
f1
f2
Dead zone area
Serving cell (Operator A) Interfering cell (Operator B)
Figure 84 Dead Zone schematic representation
Therefore, if we can avoid large power differences of own mobiles and other mobiles at the Node Bs, we get enough adjacent channel attenuation and therefore reduce the ACI problems. This can be done by avoiding scenarios where a mobile is far away from its serving cell (belonging to
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 177/19 8
MCD
operator A) but very close to a node B of operator B which then leads to minimizing the phenomenon of dead zones. The solution consists therefore in a co-location of node Bs of two operators. This means that site sharing has a positive impact of the performance of both operators systems if the RF requirements of the previous chapters are fulfilled. Please refer to chapter 7 of this guideline.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 178/19 8
MCD
11 MEASUREMENTS
[GenTest] [SiteShare] [BouyguesCoLoc] Generic Test Plan for UMTS Field Trial Site Sharing GSM-UMTS: RF Aspects, chapter 2.3 Ref. Nr.: 3DC210190005TQZZA [Bouygues Co-Location Tests]
[Calibration Guide Line] [3DF009934000PGZZA] This chapter is currently designed to give an idea what kind of test cases can be interesting to focus on. Some of the interesting test cases are shown in this chapter more detailed and in section 11.8 a list of all test cases are available.
11.1 Measurements for Pred iction Model Calibration

In the network planning of cellular networks usually macrocell prediction models are used for cell planning. These models are based on empirical propagation formulas in combination with a correction factor used to model the influence of the morpho structure. These correction factors need to be adapted to the required region by a process of propagation model calibration . Basic input for this calibration are analogue field strength measurements. This measurement type is described in the calibration guide line [3DF009934000PGZZA]. An analogue test transmitter providing a simple CW signal will be installed in a region which represents the typical morpho structure there. While driving around this station the received field strength will be monitored and mapped to the position. Based on the calculated path loss the propagation model will be adapted to the measured values. In terms of pathloss calculation the same procedure is required for UMTS networks to adapt the used prediction model to the morpho structure. Compared to a GSM network additional effects have to be considered later on in a UMTS network planning process. The most important ones in case of wave propagation are as follows:
The signal used is a wide band signal. The wide band receiver is using multipath reception. The frequency band is higher than for GSM The number of used received paths are depending on UE HO status (number of cells in active set) due to limited number of receiver fingers. The cell load is affecting the cell coverage by creation of interference (cell breathing). Fast PC may compensate the influence of fading. Additional gain may expected if the UE is in soft HO state.
In case of additional gain the following facts have to be considered:
All these facts are effecting an additional gain to the received signal strength and has to be considered in addition to the standard wave propagation.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 179/19 8
MCD
Therefor this chapter will give you some ideas about the required measurements to investigate these effects.
11.2 Measurements of Cell Coverage

The following tests are based on [GenTest]. As mentioned above the cell coverage is depending on cell load plus interference and takes advantage of additional effects of UMTS technology like HO gain or PC gain. Thereby we have to distinguish between UL and DL direction. The following chapters will describe how to measure these gains.
11.2.1 Coverage of Pilot Chan nel in DL Compared to GSM BCCH Channel

This type of measurement is used to investigate the gain of the Rake receiver using multipath reception compared to standard GSM receivers. The measured channel is the CPICH for UMTS, which is transmitted by the Node B with full power and a BCCH for GSM. We investigate the effect of the pathloss and the multipath profile in different environments. The measured entities are RSCP on CPICH with BLER / BER for WCDMA and RXLEV on BCCH with RXQUAL for GSM. The measurement should be done in the same environment for the Node B and the BTS. Best case would be a co-located installation. In that case driving the same route would be possible. A call will be established and the measurement starts at the Node B and is going faraway to the cell border. A call drop marks the end of the coverage area. Both measurements can be compared in a map to find the coverage range or putting the quality values in a graph along the distance MS - BS. Due to the fact that the UL in WCDMA networks will be more critical than the DL (cell breathing depending on traffic load) the measurement should be repeated in a high traffic situation with simulated load. This can be done by feeding in noise into the Node B receiver using an AWGN generator. An earlier call drop due to bad quality in UL will be expected.
11.2.2 Impact of Service Type on Coverage

The received signal quality of the UE depends on their receiver sensitivity which is defined: Receiver sensitivity = Thermal noise density + NF+ PG + Mi + With:

Eb N0
Thermal noise density = -174 dBm NF: Noise figure, characteristic of the equipment PG = Processing gain = Rc / R j
Rc= chip rate (system), Rj = Bit rate depending on used service j
Mi = Interference margin depending on interference coming from intra-cell and inter-cell interference
Eb = Required energy per user bit ( Eb ) over noise ( N 0 ) N0
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 180/19 8
MCD
Due to the fact that the processing gain depends on the data rate, the required reception power and even the required SIR will be different for each service bearer. Thus achievable coverage is different. A comparison with planning data will be performed for each service supported by the UMTS network. From the measurements default margins can be extracted for the use in RNP. The measured entities are Ec/Io, RSCP on DPDCH and BLER, BER of the DL transport channel. A service will be established and the measurement starts at the BTS and is going faraway to the cell border. The end of the coverage area is marked by a service drop. This procedure is repeated for each service type. Note: The formula given above for the receiver sensitivity is valid for a mono service case.
11.2.3 Investigation on HO G ain 11.2.3.1 Soft Handover Gain

Soft handover occurs when the UE is in communication with 2 Node Bs located at different sites. The gain achieved by the soft handover is a gain in terms of achieved quality and in term of required power. The quality is evaluated by the BLER or the BER according to the type of service, which is considered. Since the achievable BLER or BER depend also on the decoding function, the handover gain in terms of quality is related to the SIR gain. Since the handover is expected to improve the reception with a higher diversity, the combining gain reduces the required power. To test this gain, closed loop and open loop TPC (Transmit Power Control) should be enabled. To test soft handover performance, two tests are performed. In the first test case, only one Node B is switched on. In the second test case, both Node Bs are switched on. The UE is slowly moved over the area. Set up one UE and all the Node Bs. Position the UE where it can receive the greatest number of pilot channels, CPICH. This is equivalent to the location, where the number of radio links in the active set is maximal and will determine the number of cells in soft handover in the overlap area. Then, the UE is slowly moved until radio links are deleted. The following measurements are performed: Node B
We can compare the SIR versus BLER (or BER) with handover and the SIR versus BLER (or BER) without handover. Measurements on the radio links are available in the NBAP message, DEDICATED_MEASUREMENT_REPORTING. Following measurements can be performed in FDD mode: SIR value, SIR error value, transmitted code power value. Handover gain = (UL SIR on RL1 before addition of RL2) (UL SIR on RL1 after addition of RL) or
= (DL transmitted code power value on RL1 before addition of RL2) (DL transmitted code power value on RL1 after addition of RL2)
Measurements: RSSI on the UTRA carrier, SIR/SIR_error on each RL, BLER (BLER is calculated from number of CRC error counted at Node-B), BER, transmitted code power value on RL1, transmitted code power value on RL2 and transmit power at Node-B On the uplink and in the case of soft handover and not softer handover, we can compare the BLER and BER at each Node B and the BLER and BER after combining at the RNC. 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 181/19 8
RNC
ED
MCD
Measurements: BLER and BER at RNC On the downlink, the gain consists in the reduction of emitted power on a former radio link after the addition of a new radio link. Handover gain = UE-received code strength on RL1 with handover UE-received code strength on RL1 without handover = Node B-transmitted code strength on RL1 with handover Node Btransmitted code strength on RL1 without handover Measurements: BLER, BER, UE-transmitted power, UE-received power
UE

11.2.3.2 Softer Handover Gain

Softer handover gain will be measured using a similar method to that used for soft handover. Two sectors of the same Node B with the biggest coverage overlap will be chosen. Softer handover occurs when the UE is in communication with 2 sectors of one Node B. Like in the soft handover case, the gain achieved by the softer handover is a gain in term of achieved quality and in term of required power. To test softer handover performance, two tests are performed. In both test cases, only one Node B is turned on. In the first test case, only one sector is turned on. In the second test case, all the sectors are turned on. The UE is slowly moved over the area. Position the UE where it can receive the biggest number of pilot channels, CPICH. This is equivalent to the location, where the number of radio links in the active set is maximal and will determine the number of sectors in softer handover in the overlap area. Then, the UE is moved until one RL is dropped out of the active set. Following measurements are performed: Node-B side
We can compare the SIR versus BLER (or BER) in softer handover and the SIR versus BLER (or BER) with only one RL. Measurements on the radio links are available in the NBAP message, DEDICATED_MEASUREMENT_REPORTING. Following measurements can be performed in FDD mode: SIR value, SIR error value, transmitted code power value. Handover gain = (UL SIR on RL1 before addition of RL2) (UL SIR on RL1 after addition of RL) or = (DL transmitted code power value on RL1 before addition of RL2) (DL transmitted code power value on RL1 after addition of RL2) Measurements: RSSI on the UTRA carrier, SIR/SIR_error on each RL, BLER (BLER is calculated from number of CRC error counted at Node-B), BER, transmitted code power value on RL1, transmitted code power value on RL2 and transmit power at Node-B
RNC side No measurement is performed. There is no softer handover gain at RNC side. UE side

On the downlink, the gain consists of the reduction of emitted power on a former radio link after the addition of a new radio link Handover gain = (UE-received code strength on RL1 with handover) (UE-received code strength on RL1 without handover) = (Node B-transmitted code strength on RL1 with handover) (Node B-transmitted code strength on RL1 without handover) 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 182/19 8
ED
MCD
Measurements: BLER, BER, UE-transmitted power, UE-received power.
11.2.3.3 Influence of the UE Spe ed

One could imagine that the UE speed could damage the quality of the reception and then, the soft handover zone will become larger for a fast UE. For this test, the overlap zone is already known from previous tests. In the first test case, only one Node B is switched on. In the second test case, both Node Bs are switched on. The UE is driven fast over the area. For both test cases, same measurements as for soft/softer handover are performed. Compare the results with those obtained with a slow UE.
11.2.3.4 Influence of the Interfe rence Level

One could imagine varying the pilot strength by modifying the interference level. Noise could be added for loading purpose at the Node Bs side. This could not be done at the MS-SIM side since it would damage the pilot of both Node Bs. For this test, the overlap zone is already known from previous tests. In the first test case, only one Node B is switched on and the interference level is artificially raised. In the second test case, both Node Bs are switched on, and the increased interference level is kept at the first Node B. The UE is driven slowly over the area. For both test cases, same measurements as for soft/softer handover are performed. Compare the results with those obtained with a Node B without interference.
11.2.4 Investigation on Power Control 11.2.4.1 Open Loop Power Con trol
Open Loop power control is performed both in the UTRAN and UE to set the initial power for transmission. In the uplink, open loop power control is used by the UE in order to set the transmission power of the PRACH. The initial power of the UE during random access is set using UE measurements on the PCCPCH and broadcast system information. The UE estimates the path loss by measuring the received power of P-CCPCH, and emits the required power in order for the Node B to receive the target power level. In the downlink, open loop power control sets the initial power of the downlink DCH channels using measurement reports from the UE. The path loss indicated in the UE measurement reports should be compared with the path loss computed from the measurements of the drive test system on the CPICH. This test is done within the propagation tests.
11.2.4.2 Closed Loop Power Con trol

Downlink and uplink inner loop power control are located in both the UTRAN and UE. The closed loop power control consists of an inner and outer loop. Inner loop (UL)
If SIR SIR_target, then the Node B should set the TPC bits in the next transmitted downlink slot period such that the UE will lower its transmit power, 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 183/19 8
ED
MCD
If SIR < SIR_target, the Node B should set the TPC bits in the next transmitted downlink slot period such that the UE will increase its transmit power.
Outer Loop Outer loop power control will be performed at the SRNC. Outer loop power control adjusts the SIR_target for the inner loop comparison. The adjustment is based on frame quality information. The target SIR is sent periodically from the SRNC to each serving Node B. In downlink, the Node B emits Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands permitting to power up or down the UE power, after comparing the received SIR with the target SIR. The UE has the capability of changing the output power with a step size of 1, 2 and 3 dB according to the value of TPC, in the slot immediately after the TPC_cmd can be derived. The transmitter output power step due to inner loop power control shall be within the range shown under. For the downlink inner power control, each UE can also emit TPC commands towards the Node B, which can change Node Bs emitting power. First, we consider the case, where there is only one radio link in the active set. Either, all the other cells are shut down for this experiment, or there is the possibility to forbid a CPICH to trigger a RL addition. Therefore, there is only one Node B, which is sending TPC commands to the UE and is receiving TPC commands from it. Following measurements are performed both at the Node B and at the UE: received SIR [dB], target SIR [dB], received BLER [%], received BER [%]. We can perform a test with an activated handover. The handover tests have shown areas, on which there are several RL. We can compare the power measurements in this area. If this area is a softer handover area, same measurements as above are performed since there is always only one Node B interacting with the UE. If this area is a soft handover area, the RNC must perform selection among frames coming from the Node Bs. Therefore, received BLER [%], received BER [%] must be measured after RNC selection. Furthermore, each Node B will send its own TPC bits. The UE must cope with all the indications. From the distribution of the power control error, the average power control error and standard deviation of TPC error can be obtained. The target SIR parameters are set by UTRAN on the Node B according to measurements (BLER/BER). Different sets of parameters could be tested. After a connection has been established, collect received SIR measurements at Node B and at UE, and target SIR measurements at RNC, along the route. The speed is constant and low. The same procedure shall be performed twice: once with the outer loop power control enabled, once the outer loop power control disabled. Calculate the Power Control error distribution according to: Power Control error = SIRTarget SIRReceived Calculate the average transmission power control error, and the standard deviation. So the accuracy of the Power Control can be estimated and the effects of the outer loop power control studied.
11.2.4.3 Influence of the Propa gation Environment

When low diversity is provided, more variations of the transmitted power are observed and the average transmitted power is higher. Simulations have shown that the gain from the fast power control is larger for those cases where only a little multipath diversity is available, like in the pedestrian environment. The following procedure is performed twice: once with the Power Control disabled and once with the Power Control enabled. The UE initiates the service close to the Node B. Measurements of the ED 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 184/19 8
MCD
transmit and receive powers are performed at the Node B and at the UE, while the UE moves at a constant slow speed away from the NodeB. Measurements are continued until the call is dropped at cell edge. If possible, take measurements of the received SIR. Various propagation environments should be investigated: various multipath profile (indication at the RAKE receiver at the UE side and at the DCT at the Node B side), dense urban, urban and rural environment. The Node Bs receive and transmit power profiles are plotted against the distance to the Node B, preferentially on a map. A comparison can be done between the results without Power Control and when the Power Control is active. The first group of graphs will show the decrease of received power due to the increasing pathloss. On the second group of graphs, one should see the increase in both received and emitted power due to the Power Control.
11.2.4.4 Influence of the UE Spe ed

Simulations have shown that the gain from the fast power control is larger for low UE speed than for high UE speed. Fast power control is expected to compensate fast fading. This compensation causes peaks in the transmission power. For UE speed exceeding 50km/h, inaccuracies in the SIR estimation, power control signaling errors and the delay in power control loop degrade the performances of the fast power control. The maximum cell range is obtained when the UE is transmitting full constant power, i.e. without the gain of fast power control. The following procedure is performed twice: once with the Power Control disabled and once with the Power Control enabled. The UE initiates the service close to the Node B. Measurements of the transmit and receive powers are performed at the Node B and at the UE, while the UE moves at constant high speed away from the Node B. Measurements are continued until the call is dropped at cell edge. If possible, take measurements of the received SIR. This test must be done in an environment, which has been formerly investigated at a low speed. Several UE speeds may be investigated. The Node Bs receive and transmit power profiles are plotted against the distance to the Node B, preferentially on a map.
11.3 Interference Measurem ents

The adjacent channel interference must be considered in any wideband system where large guard bands are not possible.
11.3.1 Dead zones

Danger of Dead Zones in case of operator co-existence
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 185/19 8
MCD
f1 f2 of an other operator
Dead zone area
Serving cell (Operator A) Interfering cell (Operator B)
Figure 85: Showing operators co-existence causing dead zones
The own frequency f1 of an UE could not be received if being nearby to a Node B of an other operator having the adjacent frequency f2 (see Figure 85). The effect is that frequency f1 has not the sufficient quality in the cell center with the frequency f2, so an other operator generates a service area hole, a so-called dead zone. As summary, dead zones can exist in a coexistence of at least two operators. A solution would be a Co-location of UMTS operators, which avoids the occurrence of dead zones Methods for measurements: With the output powers of the wanted and interfering Node B set to the maximum Node B TX power, the UE is brought close to the adjacent channel interfering Node B. The first test consists in measuring the CPICH reception for the two Node Bs with the drive test system and noting the cell selection done by the UE along a given road. The second test consists in forcing the adjacent Node B to emit OCNS at full power on the adjacent band. Then, the UE is driven together with the drive test system along the test road. A communication is established with the serving Node-B. It must be studied if the cell range, meaning the limit for the reception, is influenced by the adjacent OCNS. The CPICH Ec/Io is also measured.
11.3.2 Influence of the Interfe rence Level

One could imagine varying the interference level in order to degrade the RF conditions. If OCNS is added at the Node Bs side to emulate cell load on DL, the received SIR is decreased. The UE initiates the service close to the Node B. Measurements of the transmit and receive powers are performed at the Node B and at the UE, while the UE moves at a constant high speed away from the NodeB. Measurements are continued until the call is dropped at cell edge. If possible, take measurements of the received SIR. This test must be done in an environment, which has been formerly investigated without adding interference. Several interference levels may be investigated. The Node Bs receive and transmit power profiles are plotted against the distance to the Node B, preferentially on a map for various noise level.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 186/19 8
MCD
11.4 Trial Measurements
11.4.1 Co-Siting with GSM

The document [SiteShare] presents a complete study of this topic. The required decoupling is given. In order to prevent performance degradation for co-located mobile systems, Alcatel proposes due to the three interference mechanisms the following decoupling requirements, see chapter 7:
Table 62: Decoupling requirements
GSM 900 (RX)

Specification according to: GSM 05.05 GSM 05.05 Alcatel
GSM 1800 (RX)

GSM 05.05 Alcatel
UMTS (RX)
3G TS 25.104 Alcatel
46 dB
Blocking
30 dB
85 dB
GSM spurious
85 dB
GSM spurious
GSM 900 (TX)
Alcatel
46 dB
Blocking
30 dB
61 dB
Blocking
30 dB
GSM 05.05
39 dB
Blocking
30 dB
85 dB
GSM spurious
85 dB
GSM spurious
GSM 1800 (TX)
Alcatel
39 dB
Blocking
30 dB
62 dB
Blocking
47 dB
GSM spurious
UMTS (TX)
3G TS 25.104 Alcatel
35 dB
Blocking
30 dB 30 dB
43 dB
Blocking
30 dB 30 dB
35 dB
Blocking
43 dB
Blocking
Note: It is assumed, that the decoupling provided by the antenna/diplexer system is at least 30 dB. In fact, using Alcatel EVOLIUM equipment requires for certain combinations even less isolation than those 30dB. Intermodulation is suppressed by frequency planning.
Isolation by using a diplexer for a dual-band antenna for GSM1800 and UMTS Isolation by using two diplexers for a dual-band antenna for GSM1800 and UMTS Filter for a dual-band antenna for GSM1800 and UMTS
The following measurements may applied:
Measurement for GSM system
- Spurious emission received in UL - Worse Rxlev, Rxqual distribution in DL / UL driving a specified route
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 187/19 8
MCD
Measurement for UMTS system
- Spurious emission received in UL - Increase of RSSI at BTS site - Worse UL BLER values driving the referenced route - Higher UE power required
A more detailed description of co-siting test is given in [BouyguesCoLoc].
11.4.2 Code Multiplex 11.4.2.1 Test COD1: Orthogona lity of Scrambling Codes on Downlink (Intercell)
No theoretical result is available about the orthogonality of scrambling codes on downlink. One could imagine testing the effect of code selection within one code family and from two different code families for two neighbouring cells in order to measure the interference between different downlink scrambling codes. The first Node B is assigned first PSC from a particular group. The second Node B is turned off. The UE is stationary inside the overlap area of 2 Nodes B. The CPICH RSCP, RSSI and Ec/No are measured. Then, the second Node B is assigned a different PSC from the same group and is turned on. Same measurements are performed. After all 8 PSC of the group have been tested, the adjacent group of 8 PSC can then be selected and assigned to the second Node B. This test can be repeated with other combinations of code groups. The averaged Ec/No values (y-axis) are plotted against the second Node Bs PSC 1, 2, 38 (of the same group) on the x-axis, whereby the first Node B PSC is fixed. The baseline averaged Ec/No value for the case when only the first Node B was on-air is also shown on the plot. In a second plot, the averaged Ec/No values are plotted against the second PSC 1, 2, 3 8 (of a adjacent group). More plots would be obtained if more PSC from different groups have been assigned to the second Node B. If desired, the measurement of averaged Ec/No can be performed at different UE speed using the above combinations of PSC between two Nodes B. Expected results: code-mapping strategy
11.4.2.2 Test COD2: Orthogona lity on Spreading Codes on DL (Intracell)

The parameter will be derived from interference measurements by comparing the values obtained with or without the effect of the orthogonality. Two procedures have been developed, and it could be interesting to compare the values given by each method.
Method 1:
The ETSI gives a theoretical method to derive the parameter from Eb/No computations. Two simulations are made, one with white Gaussian noise and one with intra-cell interference. The BER is then plotted as a function of Eb/No and Eb/Io respectively. These curves may differ significantly, where the Eb/Io curve is to the left of the Eb/No curve. A difference of 10 dB means that a given Eb/Io gives the same BER as Eb/No = Eb/Io + 10. Consequently, a certain Io in the system simulations is equivalent to having 10 dB less No in the link-level simulations. Hence, it is
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 188/19 8
MCD
possible to say that the orthogonality removes 90% of the interference, or in other words an orthogonality factor of 10% is obtained (10% of the interference remains). This test requires two series of measurements in the same conditions. The values of Eb/No will be measured by the UE (MS-SIM or drive test system) under different interference levels and the BER will be measured accordingly. In order to be able to measure different levels of BER, the Power Control feature shall be switched off. The variations of Eb/No are performed while increasing the noise. In the first case, the noise is generated by an AWGN simulator, in the second case by a UMTS signal generator. The noise can be fed at the Node B level or at the UE, both solutions are described below.
Measurement under real path conditions:

As we are testing the loss in the orthogonality due to the multipath propagation, a first solution would be to simulate the noise/UMTS signal from the Node B. This solution would give the best results, as the real multipath would be used, which would allow specific measurements, for example under different UE speeds.
Test scenario:
The UE is at a given distance from the Node B. The Power Control is switched off. A connection is established and the PN 9/15 signal (standardized signal) is sent from the Node B. A first series of measurements of Eb/No and the received BER is performed, the signal being disturbed by increasing AWGN (until the communication is dropped). The connection is re-established. A second series of measurements of the same parameters Eb/Io and BER is performed, the noise being generated by the synchronized UMTS signal generator, with increasing power until the communication drops. This procedure can be also repeated for different environments and at different speeds if possible on the same cell radius. Tests at different distances from the Node B can also be performed. For testing in the lab, if the UMTS signal generator is connected directly to the UE, a fading simulator has to be added, with the suitable parameters in order to simulate the multipath conditions.
Results:
For each environment/speed, plot the BER in function of Eb/No for both noise generators, i.e. OCNS and AWGN, on a same graph. The horizontal shift between the two curves represents the gain due to the orthogonality. As an example, a difference of 5 dB means that a given interference Io with UMTS signals gives the same quality as the gaussian noise No = Io 5 dB. a corresponds to the part of the remaining interference, so a= 5 dB = 0,32.
Method 2:
The UE shall perform regularly mandatory measurements. The following gives the way the parameter a is derived from these measurements. Sk,i is the power of the signal spread with the code k after transmission to the UE i with the pathloss Li, depending on the propagation environment and the UE position on the cell area. For simplification, we consider that no UE is in SHO. ISCP: Interference Signal Code Power RSSI: Received Signal strength Indicator RSCP: Received Signal Code Power ED 02 RELEASED UMTS_RNP_Guideline_ed02.doc CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA 5-Apr-2001 189/19 8
MCD
ISCPj = a x S (kj) Sk,i + Iext + Nthermal , j being the code under study, here: j = CPICH RSSIi = S (k) Sk,i + Iext + Nthermal RSSIi = S (k) Sk,i + ISCPj - a x S (kj) Sk,i RSSIi - ISCPj = S (k) Sk,i - a x S (kj) Sk,i RSSIi - ISCPj = a x Sj,i + (1-a) x S (k) Sk,i
S (k) Sk,i = Ptot Li
Sj,i = RSCPj,i RSCPj,i = Pj Li RSSIi - ISCPj = a x RSCPj,i + (1-a) x Ptot RSCPj,i/ Pj Per definition, SIR = RSCP/ ISCP and RSCPj,i / RSSI= (Ec/No) j,i Pj is a system parameter. Ptot is measured at the Node Bs antenna connector.
Ptot = =
1 - 1 - Pi E SIR c N 0 Ptot - Pi
SF is the spreading factor of the considered DPCH on downlink. Pt is the transmitted power on the considered DPCH on downlink.
Ptot i - (
=i =
PCPICH Pti ,m SF ) Ec Io SIRDPCH Ptoti - Pti ,m
Since we will compute the value from several measurements, the accuracy of the measurements must be known to check the validity of the method.
Test scenario:
The emit power of the CPICH is fixed. A communication is established between the UE and the Node B. Measurements of the CPICH Ec/No and the CPICH SIR are performed, while the total emit power at the Node B is measured thanks to a power meter. This procedure is repeated for different environments, and at different speeds. The effect of the distance from the Node B and of the services bitrate can also be studied. The equation above is used to calculate the value of the parameter a for each environment/speed.
11.5 Network Acceptance P rocedure

Acceptance tests must be specified clearly in the contract. The metholody of testing and the acceptance criteria must be clearly specified. This step can often be the bottleneck to obtaining the final payments, as well as the prospect of future expansion contract.
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 190/19 8
MCD
Acceptance tests can be conducted on a cluster, RNC or MSC basis. The cluster-based acceptance is preferred as this allows for independent clusters test to be completed, even though other cells on the RNC or MSC are not ready. In general, it is also easier to pass the cluster-based acceptance tests than RNC-based or MSC-based tests, since the cell counts are smaller. The RNS performance during busy hours would require further investigations. The methodology of testing must be documented clearly. The equipment used to collect data must be calibrated and easy to set up. The equipment setup must be able to perform consistently, from one run to another. The acceptance criteria must be logical, specific and easy to quantify. For example, to determine the data throughput from a cluster of cells, it may be important to clearly state the quality level (Ec/Io), time of the day and measurement duration when collecting the field data. Subsequent data post-processing can then filter out the relevant data and compare them against the acceptance criteria. Responsibility: Network planning and network optimization department Input to NP: Task of NP: Existing network design, field data, acceptance criteria Consultancy Output of NP: Verifications
11.6 QoS Measurements

When the UMTS Network is in operation, its performance can be observed by measurements, and the result of those measurements can be used to visualize and optimize network performance.
11.7 Recommended Measur ement Tools for Air Interface Measurements

UMTS Drive test tool E7476A from Agilent which supports the following measurement entities: Primary Sync Channel Ec, Ec/Io, Eb, Eb/Io Secondary Sync Channel Ec, Ec/Io, Eb, Eb/Io Scrambling Code: Peak Ec, Peak Ec/Io, Peak Eb, Peak Eb/Io Scrambling Code: Aggregate Ec, Aggregate Ec/Io, Aggregate Eb, Aggregate Eb/Io Delay spread Carrier Frequency Error Time Stamp Position Mobil Station Simulator or test mobile supporting the measurements as specify in 3GPP. AWGN generator to feed in noise in to a Node B Protocol Analyzer for NBAP message trace
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 191/19 8
MCD
11.8 Possible Measurement s

Test cases which could be planned during the set-up of a network or for existing network. These test cases are given in the following list.
UMTS PROPAGATION COVERAGE WITH THE PILOT AND THE SYNCHRONISATION CHANNELS CELL SELECTION COVERAGE IN TERMS OF SERVICE INTERFERENCE ON ADJACENT CHANNEL CO-SITTING WITH GSM CODE MULTIPLEX ORTHOGONALITY OF SCRAMBLING CODES ON DOWNLINK (INTERCELL) ORTHOGONALITY ON SPREADING CODES ON DL (INTRACELL) POWER CONTROL OPEN LOOP POWER CONTROL CLOSED LOOP POWER CONTROL INFLUENCE OF THE PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENT INFLUENCE OF THE UE SPEED INFLUENCE OF THE INTERFERENCE LEVEL SOFT HANDOVER NEIGHBOURING CELL SEARCH NEIGHBOURING CELL SEARCH IN CASE OF SOFT HANDOVER NEIGHBOURING CELL SEARCH IN CASE OF SOFTER HANDOVER SOFT HANDOVER AREA SOFTER HANDOVER AREA SOFT HANDOVER GAIN SOFTER HANDOVER GAIN INFLUENCE OF THE UE SPEED INFLUENCE OF THE INTERFERENCE LEVEL TUNING OF THE PARAMETERS CAPACITY AND PERFORMANCES PERFORMANCE IN AN UNLOADED NETWORK CAPACITY IN A LOADED NETWORK TEST SET OF THE DIFFERENT SERVICE BEARERS AMR(12.2KBPS)-CODED VOICE SERVICE FOR ORIGINATING CALL AMR(12.2KBPS)- CODED VOICE SERVICE FOR TERMINATING CALL DATA(384KBPS) SERVICE COMPARISON GSM/UMTS, MEASUREMENT OF THE CPICH DETECTION AREA CPICH DETECTION ON A LOADED CELL UMTS COVERAGE FOR VOICE SERVICE UMTS COVERAGE FOR VOICE ON ONE LOADED CELL UMTS COVERAGE FOR DATA -384KBPS SERVICE UMTS COVERAGE FOR DATA -384KBPS ON A LOADED CELL MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE OF SOFT HANDOVER MEASUREMENT OF THE SHO ZONES TUNING OF THE PARAMETER HYTERISIS TUNING OF THE PARAMETER REPORTING RANGE TUNING OF THE PARAMETER REPORTING DEACTIVATION THRESHOLD BEHAVIOUR OF MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONTROL INFLUENCE OF THE PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENT INFLUENCE OF THE UE SPEED INFLUENCE OF THE TPC STEPO SIZE TEST OF THE DIFFERENT SERVICE BEARERS
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 192/19 8
MCD
AMR(12.2KBPS)-CODED VOICE SERVICE FOR ORIGINATING CALL AMR(12.2KBPS)-CODED VOICE SERVICE FOR TERMINATING CALL DATA(384KBPS) SERVICE COMPARISON GSM/UMTS MEASUREMENT OF THE CPICH DETECTION AREA MEASUREMENT OF THE CPICH DETECTION ON A LOADED CELL MEASUREMENT OF THE UMTS COVERAGE FOR VOICE SERVICE MEASUREMENT OF THE UMTS COVERAGE FOR VOICE ON ONE LOADED CELL MEASUREMENT OF THE UMTS COVERAGE FOR DATA-384KBPS SERVICE MEASUREMENT OF THE UMTS COVERAGE FOR DATA-384KBPS ON A LOADED CELL MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE OF SOFT HANDOVER MEASUREMENT OF THE SHO ZONES TUNING OF THE PARAMETER HYSTERESIS TUNING OF THE PARAMETER REPORTING RANGE TUNING OF THE PARAMETER REPORTING DEACTIVATION THRESHOLD BEHAVIOUR AND MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONTROL INFLUENCE OF THE PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENT INFLUENCE OF THE MOBILE SPEED INFLUENCE OF THE TPC STEP SIZE CHARACTERISATION OF SOFT HANDOVER DL GAIN REFERENCE TEST WITH NO SHO INFLUENCE OF THE PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENT WITH ACTIVATED SHO INFLUENCE OF THE MOBILE SPEED WITH ACTIVATED SHO CHARACTERISATION OF SOFTER HANDOVER DL GAIN INFLUENCE OF THE PROPAGATION ENVIRONMENT WITH ACTIVATED SHO INFLUENCE OF THE MOBILE SPEED WITH ACTIVATED SHO VARIATION OF SOFT HANDOVER RATE IN FUNCTION OF TILT INFLUENCE OF THE TILT ON SHO AREA IMPACT OF PROPAGATION ON SENSITIVITY UE SENSIBILITY FOR VOICE WITHOUT INTERFERENCE UE SENSIBILITY FOR DATA 384KBPS WITHOUT INTERFERENCE UE SENSIBILITY FOR VOICE WITH INTERFERENCE UE SENSIBILITY FOR DATA 384KBPS WITH INTERFERENCE CHARACTERISATION OF POWER IN DL POWER ON DL FOR VOICE ON AN UNLOADED CELL POWER ON DL FOR DATA-384KBPS ON AN UNLOADED CELL POWER ON DL FOR VOICE ON A LOADED CELL POWER ON DL FOR DATA-384KBPS ON A LOADED CELL TEST SET: ACCESSIBILITY AND FILE TRANSFER RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR DATA(384KBPS) SERVICE END-TO-END DELAY FOR DATA(384KBPS) SERVICE DATA SERVICES FILE TRANSFER WEB AND WAP MAILING SERVICES STREAMING AUDIO/VIDEO CHAT , ICQ , NEWS PERFORMANCE OF TCP ON THE RADIO CHANNEL TUNING OF MTU (MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION UNIT) TUNING OF RECEIVER WINDOW SIZE, IN NUMBER OF MSS (MAXIMUM SEGMENT SIZE) TUNING OF IRTO (INITIAL RETRANSMISSION TIME OUT) PERFORMANCE OF TRAFFIC WEB TEST SET: CONFORMANCE TESTING UMTS TX SPURIOUS EMISSIONS
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 193/19 8
MCD
UMTS RX BLOCKING LEVEL REFERENCE SENSITIVITY LEVEL TEST SET: CO-LOCATION TESTS ANTENNA DECOUPLING GSM1800 REFERENCE MEASUREMENT UMTS DISTURBANCES ON GSM1800 NETWORK UMTS REFERENCE MEASUREMENT DCS DISTURBANCES ON UMTS NETWORK TEST SET: INTERFACE IU-PS BETWEEN RNS AND 3G-SGSN UE INITIAL MESSAGE AND RAB ASSIGNMENT / RAB RELEASE PAGING AND RAB ASSIGNMENT / RAB RELEASE IU RELEASE REQUEST DIRECT TRANSFER DATA VOLUME REPORT TEST SET: INTERFACE IU-CS BETWEEN RNS AND 3G- MSC/VLR UE INITIAL MESSAGE AND RAB ASSIGNMENT / RAB RELEASE PAGING AND RAB ASSIGNMENT / RAB RELEASE IU RELEASE REQUEST DIRECT TRANSFER PROCEDURES FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT (MM) FOR CS SERVICES MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: IMSI ATTACH MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: IMSI DETACH MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: AUTHENTICATION MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: IDENTIFICATION MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: TMSI REALLOCATION MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: NORMAL LOCATION UPDATE MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR CS SERVICES: PERIODIC LOCATION UPDATE PROCEDURES FOR MM FOR PS SERVICES MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: GPRS ATTACH MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: GPRS DETACH MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: AUTHENTICATION MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: IDENTIFICATION MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: TMSI REALLOCATION MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: NORMAL ROUTING AREA UPDATE MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR PS SERVICES: PERIODIC ROUTING AREA UPDATE CALL CONTROL AND SESSION MANAGEMENT CALL CONTROL PROCEDURES FOR CS PDP CONTEXT ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 194/19 8
MCD
GLOSSARY/TERMINOLOGY
NYD Not yet defined in the current version of the document.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Explanations for all abbreviations used in 3GPP are given in [21.905]. Abbreviations used in this document are given hereafter.
Abbreviation ACI ACLR AI AICH AIO AMR ANC ANXU AP AP-AICH API ARQ ASC AWGN BB BCCH BCH BER BLER BSC BSS BTS CCA CAI CC CCC CCCH CCH CCPCH CCTrCH CD CD/CA-ICH CDF CDI CN CPCH CPICH CRC CRNC CS Full meaning Adjacent Channel Interference Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio Acquisition Indicator Acquisition Indicator Channel All-In-One Adaptive Multirate Evolium Evolution Duplexer and Combiner Stage Antenna Network for UMTS Access Preamble Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Channel Access Preamble Indicator Automatic Repeat Request Access Service Class Additive White Gaussian Noise Base Band Broadcast Control Channel Broadcast Channel Bit Error Rate Block Error Rate Base Station Controller Base Station System Base Transceiver Station ControlChannel Assignment Channel Assignment Indicator Call Control CPCH Control Command Common Control Channel Control Channel Common Control Physical Channel Coded Composite Transport Channel Collision Detection Collision Detection/Channel Assignment Indicator Channel Cumulative Density Function Collision Detection Indicator Core Network Common Packet Channel Common Pilot Channel Cyclic Redundancy Check Controlling Radio Network Controller Circuit Switched
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 195/19 8
MCD
Abbreviation CSICH DC DCA DCCH DCH DEM DL DPCCH DPCH DPDCH DRNC DS-CDMA DSCH DSMA-CD DTCH DTX Ec/No EMC ETSI FACH FAUSCH FBI FCS FDD FEC FER FSW GC GGSN GMSC GoS GSM HLR HO ICH IM ISC ISCP ITU kbps L1 L2 L3 LAC LAI LNA MAC MBS Mcps MHA MM MND MS
Full meaning CPCH Status Indicator Channel Dedicated Control (SAP) Dynamic Channel Allocation Dedicated Control Channel Dedicated Channel Digital Elevation Model Downlink Dedicated Physical Control Channel Dedicated Physical Channel Dedicated Physical Data Channel Drift Radio Network Controller Direct-Sequence Code Division Multiple Access Downlink Shared Channel Digital Sense Multiple Access - Collison Detection Dedicated Traffic Channel Discontinuous Transmission Received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band Electromagnetic Compatibility European Telecommunications Standardization Institute Forward Access Channel Fast Uplink Signalling Channel Feedback Information Frame Check Sequence Frequency Division Duplex Forward Error Correction Frame Error Rate Frame Synchronization Word General Control (SAP) Gateway GPRS Support Node Gateway MSC Grade of Service Global System for Mobile Communication Home Location Register Handover Indicator Channel Intermodulation International Switching Centre Interference Signal Code Power International Telecommunication Union kilo-bits per second Layer 1 (physical layer) Layer 2 (data link layer) Layer 3 (network layer) Link Access Control Location Area Identity Low Noise Amplifier Medium Access Control Multi-Standard Base Station Mega Chip Per Second Mast Head Amplifier Mobility Management Mobile Network Design (Department within MCD) Mobile Station
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 196/19 8
MCD
Abbreviation MSC MUI OCCCH ODCCH ODCH ODMA ODMA ODTCH ORACH OVSF PC PCCH PCCPCH PCH PCPCH PCS PDF PDSCH PDU PHY PhyCH PI PICH PMP POM PRACH PS PSC PSTN QoS QPSK RACH RF RL RLC RNC RNS RNTI RRC RSCP RSSI RX SAP SCCC SCCH SCCPCH SCH SDU SF SFN SGSN SI SIR
Full meaning A 2 generation Mobile Switching Center only supporting the A interface Mobile User Identifier ODMA Common Control Channel ODMA Dedicated Control Channel ODMA Dedicated Channel Opportunity Driven Multiple Access Opportunity Driven Multiple Access ODMA Dedicated Traffic Channel ODMA Random Access Channel Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (codes) Power control Paging Control Channel Primary Common Control Physical Channel Paging Channel Physical Common Packet Channel Professional Customer Services (Department within MCD) Probability Density Function Physical Downlink Shared Channel Protocol Data Unit Physical layer Physical Channels Paging Indication Page Indicator Channel Point to Multipoint Page Oriented Model Physical Random Access Channel Packet Switched Primary Synchronisation Code Public Switched Telephone Network Quality of Service Quaternary Phase Shift Keying Random Access Channel Radio Frequency Radio Link Radio Link Control Radio Network Controller Radio Network Subsystem Radio Network Temporary Identity Radio Resource Control Received Signal Code Power Received Signal Strength Indicator Receive Service Access Point Serial Concatenated Convolutional Code Synchronisation Control Channel Secondary Common Control Physical Channel Synchronisation Channel Service Data Unit Spreading Factor System Frame Number Serving GPRS Support Node Status Indicator Signal-to-Interference Ratio
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 197/19 8
MCD
Abbreviation SRNC SRNS SSC SSDT STTD TBD TCH TDD TDMA TFCI TFI TMA TMSI TPC TSTD TX UUE UE/MS UER UL UMTS URA USIM UTRA UTRAN Uu VLR VSWR WCDMA
Full meaning Serving Radio Network Controller Serving Radio Network Subsystem Secondary Synchronisation Code Site Selection Diversity TPC Space Time Transmit Diversity To be defined Traffic Channel Time Division Duplex Time Division Multiple Access Transport Format Combination Indicator Transport Format Indicator Tower Mounted Amplifier Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity Transmit Power Control Time Switched Transmit Diversity Transmit UserUser Equipment A terminal that supports USIM, SIM, the Uu interface and the Um interface User Equipment with ODMA relay operation enabled Uplink Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UTRAN Registration Area UMTS Subscriber Identity Module UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network UMTS Air Interface Visitor Location Register Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access
List of Figures & List of Tables (TBD) Index (TBD)
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
02
5-Apr-2001 198/19 8
MCD

Alcatel - Umts Radio Network Planning Guidelines

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel - Umts Radio Network Planning Guidelines

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Site LUDWIGSBURG Originator(s) O. Aydin, U. Birkel, A. Gaertner, RM. Goerner, M. Hahn, L.

UMTS RADIO NETWORK PLANNING GUIDELINE

Approvals (get approvals from document manager)

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

REVIEW Edition Date Review Report Identification

Short description of significant changes to previous edition:

Documentation Management Systems : DIAMS EDDL - ALCATEL-EXTERNAL DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION LIST

END OF ALCATEL INTERNAL PART OF THE DOCUMENT

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

C. Brechtmann, PCS APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE (YYMMDD)

UMTS RADIO NETWORK PLANNING GUIDELINE

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Document references are given in the chapters!

WCDMA Fundamentals and UMTS Air Interface

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

Channel Types and Radio Resource Management

UMTS Services and Traffic Modeling

Link Budget and Initial Network Design

Cell Planning with planning tool

Products and Migration strategies

Multi operator environment

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

1 RNP PROCESS DESCR IPTION

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

2 WCDMA FUNDAMEN TALS AND UMTS AIR INTERFACE

3GPP 25.331 V3.4.1 3GPP 26.103 V3.0.0

3 Day UMTS training held for ALCATEL in August 2000

[OPNET] Study of soft Ref: MCD/TD/SYT/PBL/200816 [SysDesign]

UTRAN System Design Document Ed.7,

3BK 10240 0005 DSZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

Operation & Maintenance OMC Center

Table 2: UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

data signal bi(t) t

data signal consists of bipolar "bits"

PN signature signal si(t) t

signature signal consists of bipolar "chips"

spread signal gi(t)=bi(t) si(t) t

chiprate = spreading factor bitrate

Figure 7: Extracting the useful signal out of the overall noise

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

Despreading 3 Spreading OVSF (User identifier)

4 Scrambling PN (User identifier)

Figure 9: Overview on spreading and scrambling code usage

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

Step 1: Slot synchronization

Step 2: Frame synchronization and code-group identification

Step 3: Scrambling-code identification

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

Figure 10: Uplink spreading, scrambling and modulation

Figure 11: Downlink spreading, scrambling and modulation

CONFIDENTIAL 3DF 00902 UA10 VAZZA

Single User Detection (SUD)

Multi User Detection (MUD)

Interference Cancellation (IC)